JP5540054B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the bonus winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination including the bonus combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). And, when the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery can be drawn within the range of the predetermined number of frames, the effective combination is arranged, and the winning combination not in the internal lottery is configured. Reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols is not aligned with an effective line.

  For such a slot machine, the player can obtain the benefit of not having to consume medals for setting the number of bets by winning a replay. In some cases, RT (Replay Time) which increases the replay winning probability without change is determined as a gaming state other than a bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus.

JP 2005-131323 A

  The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that allows a player to have a sense of expectation.

(1) A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (for example, 3 during the initial gaming state and RT1 to RT7, and 2 during bonus) for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, the display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, thereby completing one game, and winning according to the display result derived to the variable display device. A slot machine that can be generated (slot machine 1),
Before the variable display device to display the results are derived, and pre-determining means for determining whether or not to permit the generation of a plurality of types of winning each including a special pay a particular winning (lottery process),
Derivation operation detection means for detecting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation procedure detected by the derivation operation detection means;
When the special prize display result for generating the special prize is derived to the variable display device, it is determined that the occurrence of a prize accompanying the addition of the gaming value among the plurality of kinds of prizes is permitted in a normal gaming state. Special gaming state control means (control for controlling to a big bonus or a regular bonus when winning a big bonus or a regular bonus in a winning determination process) for controlling to a special gaming state determined at a higher rate than when
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, and the result of the special prize display is not derived to the variable display device, the determination is made that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed. Carry-over means to carry over after the game (special work, payout processing),
Specific gaming state control means capable of controlling to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state when it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the specific winning is permitted;
Production execution means for executing a predetermined production,
The pre-decision means accepts the occurrence of the special prize as a decision result that permits the occurrence of the special prize when the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the carry-over means. It is possible to determine simultaneous determination that is determined at the same time and non-simultaneous determination that is not determined at the same time as allowing the occurrence of the special prize,
The effect execution means executes the specific effect when it is determined that the specific winning is allowed regardless of the simultaneous determination or the non-simultaneous determination,
Further, the production execution means executes the specific production,
Executing a special prize-allowed effect for informing information capable of specifying that it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize when being determined at the same time;
When the non-simultaneous determination is performed, a specific gaming state control effect for informing information capable of specifying the control start to the specific gaming state is executed,
The derivation control means is configured to display the special prize display when the occurrence of the special prize is permitted and when the generation of a predetermined prize different from the special prize among the plurality of types of prizes is permitted. Perform control to give the variable display device priority to the winning display result that generates the predetermined winning than the result,
The effect execution means, after executing the special winning allowance effect, allows the occurrence of the predetermined winning that the winning display result is derived to the variable display device in preference to the special winning display result. In a game that has not been determined, a special prize-promptable effect is executed for notifying that the special prize display result is derived and the special prize can be generated.

Furthermore, among the plurality of types of winnings, replay winnings (replay (1) to replay (3)) that accompany the replay that can be played without using the gaming value are allowed to occur. Is provided with a normal gaming state control means (a process for controlling to RT1 after the bonus ends in the payout process) for controlling to a normal gaming state (RT1) determined with a predetermined normal probability (9028/65536),
The special prize includes a first special prize (big bonus (1), regular bonus) and a second special prize (big bonus (2), big bonus (3)),
The specific game state control means is a time corresponding to a specific winning (replay (2), replay (3)) among the plurality of types of winnings when it is not determined that the special winning is allowed to occur. Display results ("melon-grape-grape", "cherry-grape-grape", replay (2) specific outliers that can be derived only at the time of winning, replay (2) specific outliers that can only be derived at the time of winning) When the game is derived, the specific game state (RT2, RT3) advantageous to the player who determines with the specific probability (40686/65536, 44530/65536) higher than the normal probability that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted is determined. Control)
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the second special prize as the decision result for one game, not allowing the occurrence of the specific prize and not allowing the occurrence of the first special prize. Simultaneous determination to be made simultaneously (Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1) + Replay (2) in FIG. 15, Big Bonus (3) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay ( 1) + replay (3), big bonus (3) + replay (1) + replay (3), etc.) and the occurrence of the first special prize and the second special prize are allowed. Specific winning determination means for newly determining by non-simultaneous determination (replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay (3), etc. in FIG. 15)
In a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special prize is carried over by the carryover means, it is decided with the first probability (16418/65536) that the occurrence of the re-game prize is allowed (lottery process) (See the process for controlling to RT5 when winning the big bonus (1) or regular bonus at
In a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the second special prize is carried over by the carryover means, the fact that the occurrence of the replay prize is allowed is higher than the first probability and the normal probability, and Second probabilities (25034/65536, (406686 / 65536-25034) where the difference from the specific probability is smaller than the difference between the first probability and the specific probability ((40686 / 65536-16418 / 65536) = 24268/65536). / 65536) = 15652/65536, which is smaller than 24268/65536) (see processing for controlling to RT4 when winning big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) in the lottery processing)
The derivation control means, when the occurrence of the special prize is permitted and when the occurrence of the re-game prize is allowed, further determines the prize corresponding to the re-game prize from the special prize display result. Perform control to give priority to the display result to the variable display device (refer to reel control when the special combination and re-playing combination are won simultaneously),
The effect execution means is a plurality of games on condition that it is determined that the specific winning is permitted (big bonus or regular bonus winning, replay (2) or replay (3) winning, winning a predetermined lottery) After performing a predetermined continuous performance over (3 games), it is notified that the specific game state is controlled on condition that the non-simultaneous determination has determined that the generation of the specific winning is permitted. (RT notification shown in FIG. 17), informing that it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize on the condition that the occurrence of the specific prize is determined by the simultaneous determination. (BB winning notification in FIG. 18).

  According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the specific prize may be allowed independently of the special prize, not simultaneously with the special prize, and may be allowed simultaneously with the second special prize. In addition, when a specific winning occurs, it is controlled to a specific gaming state in which it is determined with a specific probability higher than the normal probability that the re-game winning is permitted. Furthermore, in a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the second special prize is carried forward, the fact that the re-game prize is allowed is higher than the normal probability and the occurrence of the first special prize is allowed. The determination is made with a second probability that is closer to the specific gaming state than when the determination is being carried over. For this reason, from the occurrence frequency of the re-game winning in the game after the specific winning has occurred, it is controlled to the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the specific winning, or the second special winning is allowed to occur. Since the player cannot easily recognize whether or not the decision to do so has been made, the player can have a sense of expectation that the occurrence of the second special prize is permitted. Can be improved.

  In addition, during the continuous production that is started when it is determined that the occurrence of a specific prize is allowed, the probability that a re-game prize is allowed to be generated is controlled in preference to the special prize. Can be improved. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a special prize will be generated while the continuous performance is being executed, and to continue to give the player a sense of expectation that the generation of the special prize is allowed. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the above configuration, in a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special prize is carried over, the fact that the second special prize is allowed is permitted to be permitted to occur. Is determined with a lower first probability than when the game is being carried over. For this reason, even if the re-game win is not generated as much as the game is being carried over when the decision to allow the generation of the second special win is carried over when the specific win has not occurred, It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the occurrence of one special prize is permitted. As a result, regardless of whether or not a specific prize has occurred and the frequency of re-game prizes, it is possible to give players a sense of expectation that special prizes are allowed and improve the fun of the game. be able to.

  The first probability is different from the normal probability ((16418 / 65536-9010 / 65536) = 7408/65536) from the difference from the specific probability ((40686 / 65536-16418 / 65536) = 24268/65536). May be a small probability. Thereby, the first probability is set to be close to the normal probability as compared with the specific probability. As a result, when no specific winnings have occurred, the re-game winnings are not generated as much as when the occurrence frequency of the re-game winnings is allowed, for example, to allow the second special winning to occur. Even when it is close to the state, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the occurrence of the first special prize is permitted.

The pre-determining means simultaneously determines that the occurrence of the specific prize is allowed and the fact that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed (a big bonus (1) + B group, a big bonus (2) + B group) , Big Bonus (3) + B Group, Regular Bonus + B Group) and non-simultaneous decision not to allow the occurrence of the special prize (replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay (3) )) And including a specific winning determination means for determining,
The simultaneous determination by the specific winning determination means determines that the second special winning is generated with a higher probability than the fact that the generation of the specific winning is permitted and the generation of the first special winning is simultaneously performed. Determined at the same time as allowing (Big Bonus (1) and Big Bonus (3) each with a higher probability than each of the Regular Bonus (1) and Regular Bonus won simultaneously with Replay (2) and Replay (3)) , The number of judgment values is set so that it will be won simultaneously with replay (2) and replay (3)),
The pre-determining means includes
In a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special prize is carried over by the carryover means, a decision is made with a first probability that the occurrence of the re-game prize is allowed,
In a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the second special prize is carried over by the carryover means, the fact that the occurrence of the replay prize is allowed is higher than the first probability and the normal probability, and The difference from the specific probability may be determined by a second probability that is smaller than the difference between the first probability and the specific probability (see Modification (4)). Even with such a configuration, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

The specific display result may be a specific prize display result ("melon-grape-grape", "cherry-grape-grape") that generates a specific prize, and may allow the occurrence of a specific prize. It is a specific non-winning display result that can be derived only in the decided game (replay (2) specific outliers that can be derived only at the time of winning, replay (2) specific outliers that can be derived only at the time of winning). May be. Even if it is a case where it comprises in this way, there can exist the same effect.
(2) The variable display device is capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving the plurality of types of identification information.
In the slot machine, when the display result is derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, one game is completed, and the display result derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a display result of one game. Depending on the combination, winnings can be generated,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow generation of a plurality of types of winnings including the special winnings and general winnings other than the special winnings,
When the operation is detected by the derivation operation detection unit, the derivation control unit is configured to display from a display position positioned within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection unit. Perform control to derive any display position based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination to determine independently that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determination that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining that a second general winning different from the general winning is permitted, and simultaneously determining that the first general winning is permitted and the special winning is permitted are determined simultaneously. A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of the first general prize, permitting the occurrence of the second general prize, and allowing the occurrence of the special prize Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the third decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the third decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the fourth determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the fourth determination and the probability of the fourth determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Done
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection means, and the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection means A first display position at which identification information constituting a specific identification information combination in a first line among a plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display areas within a predetermined pull-in range stops and the plurality of lines Control is performed for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions where the identification information constituting the specific identification information combination is stopped on the second line. When both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection means Control is performed to derive the first display position, and the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection unit. Performing control to derive the second display position when only the second display position is located;
When the second condition in which the second determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection unit, and the variable display region corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection unit A control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within a predetermined pull-in range; Control is performed to derive the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the detection means. In the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detecting means, only the second display position is positioned among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range. Performs control to derive the second display position when the.
(3) The variable display device is capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving the plurality of types of identification information.
In the slot machine, when the display result is derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, one game is completed, and the display result derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a display result of one game. Depending on the combination, winnings can be generated,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow generation of a plurality of types of winnings including the special winnings and general winnings other than the special winnings,
When the operation is detected by the derivation operation detection unit, the derivation control unit is configured to display from a display position positioned within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection unit. Perform control to derive any display position based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination to determine independently that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determination that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining that a second general winning different from the general winning is permitted, and simultaneously determining that the first general winning is permitted and the special winning is permitted are determined simultaneously. A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of the first general prize, permitting the occurrence of the second general prize, and allowing the occurrence of the special prize Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the fourth decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the third determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the third determination and the probability of the third determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Done
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection means, and the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection means A first display position at which identification information constituting a specific identification information combination in a first line among a plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display areas within a predetermined pull-in range stops and the plurality of lines Control is performed for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions where the identification information constituting the specific identification information combination is stopped on the second line. When both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection means Control is performed to derive the first display position, and the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection unit. Performing control to derive the second display position when only the second display position is located;
When the second condition in which the second determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection means, and the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection means A control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within a predetermined pull-in range; Control is performed to derive the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the detection means. In the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detecting means, only the second display position is positioned among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range. Performs control to derive the second display position when the.

( 4 ) The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the specific prize when a predetermined period has elapsed without being determined to allow the special prize to occur (for example, when 1000 games have been consumed). Is determined with a higher probability than before the predetermined period elapses (refer to the process for controlling to the initial gaming state when RT1 is terminated by using the prescribed number of games in the payout process).

  According to such a configuration, when a special prize is not generated for a predetermined period, the probability that the generation of a specific prize is permitted is increased. For this reason, the expectation with respect to being controlled by a specific game state can be improved. It is also possible to make it easier for a player who has not received a special prize for a predetermined period to be relieved.

( 5 ) The specific prize includes a first specific prize (replay (2)) and a second specific prize (replay (3)) different from the first specific prize,
The specific gaming state control means includes
When the first specific display result corresponding to the first specific winning is derived, the fact that the second specific winning is permitted is determined with a higher probability (see FIG. 15) than in the normal gaming state. Control to the first specific gaming state (RT2),
When the second specific display result corresponding to the second specific winning is derived, it is determined with a higher probability (see FIG. 15) that the re-game winning is permitted than in the first specific gaming state. To the second specific gaming state (RT3).

  According to such a configuration, even after the first specific winning is generated and controlled to the first specific gaming state, a sense of expectation that the second specific winning is further generated and controlled to the second specific gaming state. Can be held in the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

( 6 ) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L to 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and causes the plurality of variable display areas to derive the identification information. Is possible,
The derivation control means permits the occurrence of the special prize in a predetermined variable display area (reel 2L) among the plurality of variable display areas when it is determined that the generation of the specific prize is permitted. Is controlled so as to derive predetermined identification information ("Black 7 / Cherry / Black 7", see FIG. 16 (b)) that can be derived when it is determined (reel capable of stopping the first reach) Control).

  According to such a configuration, even when the occurrence of the special prize is not permitted, the predetermined identification information can be derived in the predetermined variable display area when the generation of the specific prize is permitted. By deriving the predetermined identification information, it is possible to increase the chances of giving a sense of expectation that the generation of the specific prize and the special prize is permitted.

( 7 ) The derivation control means may generate the other special prize more than when it is determined to allow the special prize of either the first special prize or the second special prize. A predetermined display result (first reach, FIG. 16 (FIG. 16) that can be derived when it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is determined has a higher probability when it is determined that it is permitted. a) (see the reel control that can stop the first reach, see modification (3)).

  According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, a sense of expectation that the occurrence of one special prize having a low probability of performing control for deriving the predetermined display result is permitted. Can be held by the player.

( 8 ) The pre-determining means does not independently determine that a special winning (single winning combination) out of the plurality of types of winnings is permitted as a result of determination for one game (other than during bonus) In the gaming state, it is not read out alone as a lottery target, refer to FIG. 15) Special simultaneous determination (Big Bonus (1) in FIG. 15 + 1), Big Bonus determined at the same time as allowing the occurrence of the special prize (1) + Melon + 1 Bonus, Big Bonus (2) + 1 Bonus, Big Bonus (2) + Melon + 1 Bonus, Big Bonus (3) + 1 Bonus, Big Bonus (3) + Melon + 1 Bonus, Regular Special winning decision means to perform bonus + 1 piece combination, regular bonus + melon + 1 piece combination),
The derivation control means includes
In the game in which the special simultaneous determination is performed, the display result is a display result other than the special prize display result and is not derived in the game in which it is not determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated. The first special winning determination display result (second reach, see FIG. 16C) is controlled (see the reel control when the bonus is won at the same time as the winning combination),
In a game in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the special simultaneous decision is made is carried over by the carry-over means, a display other than the special prize display result and when the first special prize is decided Display result other than the result, which is not derived in a game for which the occurrence of the special prize is not determined to be allowed (second reach other than the second reach) ) Can be derived (refer to reel control when a bonus is won but not a single winning combination).

  According to such a configuration, in a game in which the special simultaneous determination that the occurrence of the special winning is permitted and the special simultaneous determination that the occurrence of the special winning is permitted, the display result at the time of determining the first special winning can be derived. In contrast, in a game in which the decision to allow the generation of a special prize after the special simultaneous decision is carried over is different from the special prize display result and the display result at the time of the first special prize decision, the special prize is displayed. It is possible to derive a display result at the time of determining the second special prize that is not derived in a game in which it is not determined to allow the occurrence of. For this reason, first, it is possible to derive different display results depending on whether or not the game is allowed to generate special prizes, and allow special prizes to be generated in games where special prizes are allowed to occur. Different display results can be derived depending on whether the game is determined to be performed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to variously change the display result derived according to the situation where the occurrence of winnings is permitted, and to improve the fun of the game.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(B) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing 1a);
A second frame (front door 1b) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing 1a);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door 1b);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring a detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Opening for determining whether or not the second frame (front door 1b) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). A determination means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door 1b) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door 1b) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(C) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

(D) Control to a high probability state (RTa) in which a re-game winning that allows a next game without using the gaming value is derived with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state With high probability state control means,
The high probability state control means may control one of a plurality of types of states having different probabilities that the decision to allow the occurrence of a re-game winning is made (see Modification (13)). . Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of state is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the high probability state control means is further configured to control to the first high probability state (RTa) on the condition that the control to the special gaming state has ended.
Further, the pre-determining means controls the first replay winning (replay (2)) and the second replay winning among at least a plurality of types of replay winning when the first high probability state is controlled. Determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize so that the probability that the derivation of (Replay (3)) is permitted is higher than that in the normal gaming state;
The high probability state control means includes:
On the condition that the first re-game winning is generated when the first high-probability state is established, the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-play winning is allowed is the first Control to a second high probability state (RTb) which is advantageous to the player higher than the one high probability state;
On the condition that the second re-game winning is generated when the first high-probability state is established, the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-play winning is allowed is the first It may be configured to control to a disadvantageous state (RTc) for a player who does not control to the second high probability state even if the first re-game winning is generated lower than the one high probability state (Modification) (Refer to (13)).

  According to such a configuration, when the control is performed to the first high probability state, a sense of expectation for the control to the second high probability state is provided, and an anxiety to the control to the disadvantageous state is provided. Compared to a slot machine that is not controlled to the second high probability state or the disadvantageous state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as described above, a plurality of special prizes are provided, and when controlling to a special gaming state according to the type of special prize that has occurred, the high probability state control means The probability that the occurrence of the first re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means and the determination that the occurrence of the second re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means are made. The first high probability states (RTa, RTa ′, RTa ″, RTa according to the type of the special gaming state that has been completed can be controlled to a plurality of types of first high probability states having at least one of the probabilities "") May be configured to be controlled (see the modification (13)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the big bonus is terminated and the RT symbol is derived, that is, controlled to a high probability state according to a certain probability. Which type of special prize will occur, that is, the type of special prize that will be controlled to the first high probability state of the type that has a high probability of being determined to allow the occurrence of the first replay prize Can attract the attention of the player. In addition, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation for the control to the more advantageous second high-probability state according to the type of special gaming state to be controlled, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be made.

(E) The high probability state control means controls to the high probability state (RT) on the condition that the special gaming state has ended,
The special prize for generating the special prize is a combination of different types of identification information for each of the plurality of variable display areas (for example, big bonus (1) is “black 7-grape-melon”, big bonus (2) For example, “Grape-White 7-BAR”)
The production execution means
The type controlled to the special gaming state is controlled so that it becomes difficult for the player to be specified between the occurrence of the special prize and the end of the special gaming state (the same regardless of the bonus type). It may be configured to perform a bonus presentation of the content (see modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify the type of the special prize that has occurred from the display result, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice which type of special gaming state is being controlled. For this reason, the number of games controlled to a high probability state becomes difficult to understand compared to the conventional slot machine in which the type of special prize is specified from the display result. Can effectively improve the interest of the game.

(F) A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when a winning prize is generated among the plurality of types of winnings;
Procedure for performing procedure notification control (navigation effect) for notifying the player of information that can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be derived by the prior determination means A notification means (game effect execution process),
The procedure notification means performs the procedure notification control until a predetermined notification period (the number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses from a predetermined timing after being controlled to the high probability state.
The expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting unit per game in the high probability state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification unit when it is within the notification period. When the stop operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet amount is larger than the amount of game value used for setting the bet number. (See modification (15)).

  According to such a configuration, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given when in the high probability state and within the notification period is determined by operating the number of bets by operating according to the procedure specified from the notified information. More than the amount of game value used for setting. The high probability state is continued at least as long as no special prize is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the high probability state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special prize and performs a stop operation according to the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the amount of games to be given when the player is in a high probability state and within the notification period. Useful value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

(G) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (for example, a touch panel, various switches) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game. )
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. And during-inspection control prohibition means to be prohibited.

  According to such a configuration, in order to inspect whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the game control means for operation test is connected to the performance control means and the operation test is performed. In this case, when the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, control based on reception of new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. Therefore, unless the detection of the operation detection state of the effect operation means is performed, the operation does not shift to the operation based on reception of new control information. For example, the effect control means receives the test control information of the effect operation means. After that, even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.

  Note that the control information may be information indicating the control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control. In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits control based on reception of new control information may not be reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. Control based on the above may not be performed.

(H) In the slot machine of (G), the effect operating means detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) and specifies the operated position. Including touch panel
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. Abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor Since it is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.

  The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the detection of the sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time, and thereafter not use the invalidated sensor, or periodically invalidate the sensor. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

  (I) After the start of a high-probability state in which a control for deriving a winning that can be performed in the next game without using the gaming value with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state has been started, If the pre-determining means determines that the special winning (bonus) is allowed to occur before the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, the special probability is not terminated and the special probability is not terminated. The high probability state may be configured to end when a winning occurs or when the number of games digested without the special winning reaches the specified number of games (see Modification (14)). ).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the generation of a special prize is permitted after the high probability state is started and before the specified number of games is reached, the special prize permitted by the determination is generated. Otherwise, the high probability state does not end with the determination, and the high probability state can be continuously controlled until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, even if it is decided to allow the occurrence of a special prize in the high probability state, if the special prize permitted by the decision does not occur, the high probability state can be digested until the specified number of games is reached. Compared with the conventional slot machine where the high probability state ends due to the high probability state being allowed to generate a special prize, the player feels lost when controlled to a high probability state. There is no giving. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it is decided that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed while being controlled to a high probability state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

(J) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pull-in range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
The specified general winning symbol (orange, plum) does not stop on any winning line in the variable display area (reserved reel) for which the display result has already been derived, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas In a state where the result is not derived (a state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is displayed for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result is not yet derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within a pull-in range) that can be pulled in, any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is won. You may comprise so that the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) may be derived | led-out on top (refer modification (11-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(K) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pull-in range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) include the plurality of specific general winning symbols (orange, plum). Is stopped on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5), and the remaining of the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) from which the display result has already been derived In the variable display area (stopped reel), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is not stopped on the one winning line, and the display result is not yet derived in one or more variable display areas. In the absence state (the state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is drawn for the variable display area (the changing reel) for which the display result has not yet been derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) that can be inserted, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is derived on the one winning line. You may comprise so that control may be performed (refer modification (11-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(L) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. In order to generate a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control to derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The third decision occupying the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is made. And the probability that the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1) And the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination occupying the total probability of the sheet (2) + BB (2)) and the first to fourth determinations with different probabilities,
The derivation control means includes
The first pay line (winning line) is established when the first condition that the first decision (orange, plum) or the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is satisfied. A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-) for generating the specific general winning in the line L1, L2, L3) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5). Control to derive the plum)
The second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) When the second condition made is satisfied, the second general winning line (winning lines L4, L5) has a higher proportion than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3). You may comprise so that the control which derives the combination (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating a prize may be performed (refer modification (11-2)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

(M) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. In order to generate a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control to derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The sum of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 (2) + BB (2)) The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the probability, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the third decision (orange + BB ( 1), the first to fourth determinations are performed with different probabilities of the ratio of the probability of the third determination occupying the total probability of the plum + BB (2));
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) is made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) ( (Orange-Orange-Orange, Plum-Plum-Plum)
When the second condition in which the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum +1 sheet (2)) and the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) are made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) at a higher rate than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) ( You may comprise so that control which derives orange-orange-orange and plum-plum-plum) may be performed (refer modification (11-2)).

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

(N) The derivation control means is a time when the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, and among the plurality of types of prizes, a predetermined priority general prize (replay, normal small part) different from the special prize is obtained. When the occurrence is permitted, control is performed such that the priority general prize display result corresponding to the priority general prize is prioritized over one of the plurality of prize lines over the special prize display result. ,
The special prize includes a plurality of types of special prizes (big bonuses (1) to (3), regular bonuses, etc.) having different corresponding special prize display results,
Number of types of special prizes that do not overlap operation procedures for deriving corresponding special prize display results to the variable display device by the derivation control means (big bonuses (1) to (3) with different operation procedures for derivation) And 4 types of regular bonus) allow the occurrence of the priority general prize by the pre-determining means in the number of continuous effect games (the number of games for which continuous effect is executed) and the number of continuous effect games. The number of types of special prizes that do not overlap the operation procedure, the number of consecutive effect games, and the number of games, so that the number is larger than the difference from the allowable number of games to be determined (the number of winning games in design). The probabilities for determining that the pre-determining means allow the occurrence of the priority general prize are set (see modification (8)).

  According to such a configuration, the number of types of special prizes that do not overlap the operation procedure is continuous compared to a slot machine that is set to be smaller than the difference between the number of continuous effect games and the number of allowed games. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a special prize display result corresponding to a special prize that is allowed to be generated during the performance is derived. As a result, it is possible to maintain a long-awaited expectation that the special winning is permitted while the continuous performance is being executed.

  Note that the special winning with no overlapping operating procedures refers to a special winning with no common operating procedure. Special winnings that do not overlap operation procedures are, for example, special winnings that do not have a common operation timing for all reels among a plurality of reels, and common to some reels (for example, the right reel 2R) among a plurality of reels. However, there is a special prize that does not have a common operation timing for the other reels (for example, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C).

  Further, the number of types of special prizes that do not have overlapping operation procedures refers to the number of types of special prizes that do not have a common operation procedure. For example, in a slot machine provided with three types of big bonuses (1) to (3), when each of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is a big bonus that does not have a common operation procedure, It can be said that the number of types of special prizes that do not overlap the operation procedure is 3 of the big bonuses (1) to (3). Further, in the slot machine provided with three types of big bonuses (1) to (3), there is a common operation procedure for the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2). When the big bonus (2) and the big bonus (3) are big bonuses that do not have a common operation procedure, the types of special prizes that do not overlap the operation procedures are the big bonus (1) and the big bonus ( 2) and 2 of the big bonus (3).

(O) External test for performing processing for causing the variable display device to derive the same display result as when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation procedure based on operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined operation procedure The apparatus (test apparatus 1200) further includes output means (for example, the sub control unit 41 and the input / output board 1100) for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure.
The output means outputs operation procedure information (recommended operation procedure information) according to the determination result by the prior determination means (see FIG. 19 and modification (10)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

  The output means outputs information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) (information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R) as the recommended operation procedure information. (Refer to Modification (10)).

  The output means operates as a recommended operation procedure information when a prize determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-decision means is operated in a predetermined first operation procedure (a predetermined small combination is not awarded). Information for specifying a predetermined second operation procedure to be generated with a higher probability than when the stop operation is performed (see Modification (10)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of the start of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and a winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of a lottery object combination and the gaming state read as a lottery object role. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st reach eye and the 2nd reach eye. It is a timing chart for concretely explaining a continuous production. It is a timing chart for concretely explaining a continuous production. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine on which a test apparatus for performing a type test and an input / output board for inputting / outputting test information used for the test are mounted.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a (not shown) whose front surface is open, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are “melon (for example, area number 7 of the left reel 2L)” and “banana (for example, area number 1 of the left reel 2L). "Cherry (for example, design of area number 11 on left reel 2L)", "Black cherry (for example, design of area number 11 on right reel 2R)", "Grape (for example, area number of left reel 2L) 6 ”),“ star (for example, the design of area number 1 on the right reel 2R) ”,“ BAR (for example, the design of area number 3 on the left reel 2L) ”,“ black 7 (eg, on the left reel 2L) A plurality of identifiable numbers such as “design of area number 17)”, “net 7 (eg, design of area number 10 of the left reel 2L)”, “white 7 (eg, design of area number 5 of the left reel 2L)” The kind of design In the constant sequence, depicted by 21, respectively. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (in this embodiment, an initial game described later) The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting 3 in RT (Replay Time) in which the winning probability of the state and the replay is changed, and 2 in the regular bonus, and setting of medals and bets stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the used medals (returning the medals used for setting credits and bets), starting the game Start switch 7 is operated when that reel 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired during a big bonus, regular bonus, and RT described later, and when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code indicating the contents and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described later DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper right side. There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across the symbols lined up in a row, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined down to the right. All the winning lines L1 to L5 are valid when a specified number of bets are set in the normal gaming state, RT, big bonus, and regular bonus.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds). The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop (for example, whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is a circuit that outputs the signal. Although not specifically shown, the main control unit 41 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt occurs, and the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 Performs power interruption interrupt processing according to external interrupts. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 5, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that the RB is in progress, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a transition to the setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating a medal selector abnormality and a payout error signal indicating a hopper unit 34 abnormality are output.

  In this embodiment, there is a challenge time (a gaming state where the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) and a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, there is a gaming state between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a signal during CT indicating that the challenge time is in progress and a signal during CB indicating that the gaming state is during the challenge bonus is connected, and there is a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future. It is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 for electrical connection with the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal), and (CB signal) are directly pulsed via the relay circuit 1001. The signal is output to the information providing terminal board 1010 as a signal.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal), and (CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. Is done. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal among these external output signals, The setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal, which is a serial signal that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and externally converted. The door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be output from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a serial signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a payout error signal can be output by an AND circuit or the like. If it is output, an error signal may be output to the outside with one terminal. Even in this case, an error occurs in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. It is possible to specify that any of them is occurring, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used by the main CPU 41a to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above, for example, in order to manage sales in the hall computer. And a control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that control for canceling the output must be performed. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment has a main CPU 41a when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined. Outputs medals IN signals for the set number of bets together.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collected. Since it is outputted to the outside, it becomes possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the betting number, and the control relating to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment indicates that, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Outputs OUT signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 6B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected during medal payout, or the medals continue. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal is actually output. Since the number of medals paid out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively at the end of the medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotating shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 8A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 8B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 8B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 8B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being stopped, and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from deviating from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without performing the next game start operation), and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released when (the same timing as) has elapsed (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, if a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the next game, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so the player is playing a game. In the meantime, it is possible to maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced. On the other hand, in a state in which the player is unlikely to play, the load on the component parts of the stepping motor can be reduced.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and 3 By performing the reel motor stop control together with the phase excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and then the three-phase excitation stop control. As a result, the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. The inner rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices, LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay ) And a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes This is a work that stores a winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when transitioning to the setting change mode), and a gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  Note that when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the gaming state before the setting change mode is changed. For example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT, the game state is controlled such that the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained even after the mode change mode is changed. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, in the case of shifting to the setting change mode during the bonus winning, the winning flag of the bonus is initialized, and when winning in the bonus lottery, the winning flag can be set again and the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained. Controlled by the state.

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and when the transition to the setting change mode is performed, when initialization is performed or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the initialization 0, all the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized and controlled to the initial gaming state. .

  Initialization 1 is the state where only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and is the initialization performed before the transition to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the storage area of the RAM 41c is All the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the set stop phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. At this time, the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting change by maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work. In this case, these stop phases can be specified. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is used as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set and set in the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting change. Motor 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Then, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a is the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excitation in match condition, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) without performing the game start operation, similarly to the excitation state of the stop phase maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the standby timing (same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) elapses, and by doing so, there is no burden on the parts constituting the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and if it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or Until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated), the game is controlled to a full error state in which the progress of the game is disabled.

  In the present embodiment, medals thrown in from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and medals overflowing when the hopper tank 34a is full are stored in the overflow tank 35. The full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. However, the overflow tank 35 is not provided, and whether or not the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a exceeds a certain amount. A full tank sensor may be provided to detect whether the hopper tank 34a is full, and the full tank sensor is used to detect the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the ON state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration after the change from off to on is determined. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, the effective insertion of medals is performed. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits. If no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, medals stored in the overflow tank 35 based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control ends. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage in the tank is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, even if a game in which no medals are inserted from the outside, it is monitored whether or not the amount of medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full. However, the amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full despite the fact that the amount of stored medals does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored as to whether or not the game has entered the state, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player. There is also a problem that increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game. It is not detected and the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not it is full is not performed wastefully, and the full state can be monitored efficiently. The control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor required for the store clerk to resolve the full tank status. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is made, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game starts without the medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the tank is in a tan state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank condition.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of medals is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without inserting medals. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. The full tank error state is controlled before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state in which the medal is paid out and controlling to a full tank error state and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not a full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the tank is full is determined at the timing when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is full at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, or to start the game. You may make it determine whether it is a full state at the time of operation detection, or the time of completion | finish of game control.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is completed, that is, when a re-game player wins in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, and the determination of whether or not it is a full tank error is performed wastefully. The full tank state can be monitored efficiently, the control load required to determine the full tank state can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Or to the Shii I think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, Controls to, when the subsequent full Tan'era state is released, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, standby for the effect control board 90 A plurality of types of commands including a command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a setting value command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command includes the game state of the next game (whether it is in the initial game state, during RT, and what kind of RT, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) and during RT. This is a command that can specify the number of remaining games and the currently set value, and is transmitted after a setting end command to be described later and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The set value command is a command indicating the set value currently set, and is transmitted when the setting is changed and when the power is turned on.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. or some or disabled state (one BET switch 5, MAXBET reception operation of the switch 6 is a capable betting amount setting state, and by betting amount prescribed number is set yet Orazu, further It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in start-up processing and game processing described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt processing described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game ends, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and the operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is performed by timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. A plurality of commands can be transmitted by transmitting only one of a command stored in the command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms, the sub-control unit 91 can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  Note that the timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the basic process for the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  In this embodiment, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area where a plurality of commands can be stored. The command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer are provided. Alternatively, it is possible to store a newly generated command in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands. (In the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that.) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that if the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or if the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting for transmission (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. More specifically, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25 is made positive logic in the port input processing performed in any of timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt processing (main), that is, every 0.56 ms. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, a logical state of about 100 ms (door monitoring process 45 times) is performed for the fixed state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the above-described port input process (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is performed with priority over the normal command, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. As a result, even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, it is normal that after the door command is transmitted and before the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input processing performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to a positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) are acquired, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2; that is, the switch monitoring processing performed every 2.24 ms is 1 acquired in the port input processing described above. The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to OR each separately and use the result to make one BET switch 5, M Determining XBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In the present embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. In this case, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer, and when a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the first timer interrupt is performed thereafter. The command received by the process (sub) is read and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command for each of a plurality of types of stages (for example, the first stage to the third stage) for specifying the aspect of the effect by the character and the background, Control patterns of these effect devices, such as the lighting mode of the effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting mode of the reel LED, are registered. When receiving the command, the sub CPU 91a refers to the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command among the control patterns registered corresponding to the stage set in the RAM 91c in the game in the control pattern table. The rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. That is, the sub CPU 91a controls the effect device so as to execute the effect according to the received command in a mode specified from the set stage type. The plurality of types of stages in the present embodiment include background images displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, characters appearing, sound effects / game sounds output from the speakers 53, 54, lighting patterns of the effect effect LEDs 52, and the like. At least one of the aspects is set to be different.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by reception of a certain command (excluding a continuous effect described later), the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, An effect based on a control pattern corresponding to a newly received command is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a betting number setting operation is performed during execution of an effect (excluding a continuous effect described later), that is, the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the bet number has been set. Sometimes, the current performance is canceled. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  Each time a predetermined number of games are consumed, a stage is selected according to a predetermined distribution ratio and set in the RAM 91c. The distribution rate is set such that, for example, the probability of selecting a specific stage (for example, the first stage) is higher when winning the bonus than when winning the big bonus or the regular bonus. It may be a thing. As a result, it is possible to predict whether or not a big bonus or a regular bonus has been won based on the type of stage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the stage set in the game, and The effect device is controlled based on the above.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the bonus finalization effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and even if a standby command is received in such a state, the demo pattern is not displayed. It is not referred to as a control pattern, and a demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the startup and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). Even if it is used and illegally set to win the special role, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role has been won. Thus, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won to a player at the start of sales at a game shop.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively suppress illegal sales such as providing slot machines 1 that are set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role is won and the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 that controls the special role. It is executed by a production device such as the LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is set illegally, the special control is made when the main control unit 41 is restarted. The winning device is informed that the winning is made and it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool is used when the game player starts business. It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, In addition, when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 are notified of the special role winning. Also good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even when a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door open notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door open notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door open) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door opening notification is stopped. If the opening notification is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. To do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is made.

  Although it is necessary to open the front door 1b in order to perform some fraudulent action on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, in the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, Since the fact is notified, it is possible to effectively prevent such a fraud and to detect it early even if a fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and indicates the detection state after the change when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. Only by transmitting a door command, it is not determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a indicates a door opening detection switch indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of 25, and the door opening notification is performed based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU 41a opens the front door 1b. In the notification, it is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening). Detection chattering prevention determination of the switch 25) is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Further, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game ends. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can always be acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Also, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In the present embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. However, even if the door open detection switch 25 detection state changes while waiting for transmission of a power-on command or an initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the door command and normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If the door command is stored while interrupting the message in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed is overwritten, and the door command is partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a command is stored, and when reels are shaken or medals are paid out. There is a possibility of affecting other controls such as blurring, but the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above, so that the door command is regularly used for basic processing. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing and stored in the transmission buffer within the timer interrupt processing (main) that is executed by interrupting the interrupt, it is necessary to prohibit the interruption when storing the normal command And the above problems can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25, and after the door command is transmitted, the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is further transmitted. It is set to about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms required until the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, and the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are used in the progress of the game. When an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state changes the detection state of these switches, the operation reception of these switches is a valid period for the progress of the game. The sub CPU 91a can specify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation has been effectively performed. Sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10 In addition to the timing that coincides with the timing at which the game is activated and the game control proceeds, if the operation of these switches is in an invalid state, that is, the timing is not directly related to the game progress control. It becomes possible to execute.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection unit is not installed, but it is originally installed to advance the game, and the operation unit detects the game using the operation unit detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10 are operated, and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. Even so, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If an operation detection command is stored while the normal command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, and the rotation of the reel Other controls, such as blurring when paying out medals, may affect other controls. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored with a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and when the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 according to the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (game control board for testing) before shipment. .

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output By designating the component corresponding to the port and its operation mode by the inspection command, it is possible to inspect the operation of the designated component. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical component during the bonus, and the BGM output during the bonus are designated.

  One inspection command can specify only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode. When inspecting by operating different components of the output port at the same time, each output can be specified. Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously transmit 40 inspection commands in this embodiment even if only a test for operating all the electrical components is performed, and the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested at the same time. When performing, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a speaker, and an inspection command that specifies the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a receives it from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM and the data stored in the ROM 91b are collated, and the result of whether or not they match is indicated on the liquid crystal display 51. To display.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is specified, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. It is prohibited to receive new commands until When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation mode in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration component are specified. Operate with.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in a reception buffer that stores a command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer is provided. Thus, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated in such a number as to prevent overflow in the case of a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) ), And a large number of inspection commands can be transmitted continuously up to the limit of the storage area of the reception buffer (128 commands in this embodiment). Can effectively increase the efficiency.

  In the present embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually specified and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting inspection commands for designating a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each effect part operates normally. .

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, an effect part corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands on the basis of the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer. In this case, even when test commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command, but with one inspection command. It may be possible to specify only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing performance tests for all production parts at once, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production part are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so operation is more efficient. A test can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as the touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. In this case, if the next inspection command is erroneously transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation There is a problem that the test is shifted to the test, and the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for performance cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives an inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel and performs the operation check of the touch panel, the touch operation is detected in the command reception interrupt process. In the meantime, no new command is received. Even if a new command is sent during this period, a new command is detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. Is not received, and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected until the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, for example, buttons and dials may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be applied. In the same way as above, even if the inspection command is erroneously sent without waiting for the completion of the operation check, the operation check is performed by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected. The test can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that the test command for specifying the operation check can be used. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a combination of lottery object combinations and a gaming state read out as a lottery object combination. Note that the slot machine in the present embodiment has an initial gaming state controlled when the prescribed number of games is exhausted during RT1, which will be described later, or when the above-described initialization 0 is performed, and RT in which the winning probability of replay is changed. , And a bonus controlled by bonus winning. Also, RT shifts to the setting change mode during RT1 controlled after the bonus ends, RT2 and RT3 controlled by specific replay winning, RT4 and RT5 controlled when the bonus is won internally, and RT4 and RT5. RT6 and RT7 that are controlled at the time. Since RT1 is a gaming state that occupies most of the game as will be described later, it is also referred to as a normal gaming state.

  First, with reference to FIG. 14, the types of winning combinations, the symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the special combination includes a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a big bonus (3), and a regular bonus.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “network 7−network 7−network 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (3) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When winning one of the big bonuses (1) to (3), the gaming state shifts to the big bonus.

  When the big bonus is controlled, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus ends. While the gaming state is the big bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of the big bonus won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus medium flag is repeatedly set to the ON state when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started. The

  The big bonuses (1) and (2) are terminated on condition that 451 or more medals have been paid out to the player. On the other hand, the big bonus (3) ends on the condition that 286 or more medals have been paid out to the player.

  The game state is controlled by RT5 from when the big bonus (1) is won internally until winning. On the other hand, the gaming state is controlled by RT4 until either of the big bonuses (2) and (3) is won internally until the big bonus is won. In RT4 and RT5, the probability of winning the replay is higher than in the case of RT1. In addition, when controlled to RT4 or RT5, even if the replay (2) or replay (3) is won, the control to RT4 or RT5 is maintained without controlling to RT2 or RT3.

  When the big bonus is won, after the big bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the big bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are invalidated except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the game cannot be progressed. Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated.

  In addition, after the big bonus ends, the gaming state is controlled to RT1 until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. RT1 controlled after the end of the big bonus continues until the big bonus or regular bonus is won, the replay (2) or replay (3) described later is won, or 1000 games as the prescribed number of games are consumed. Controlled. In RT1, the probability of winning the replay is higher than in the initial gaming state. When a replay (2) is won during RT1, RT2 is controlled. When a replay (3) is won during RT1, RT3 is controlled. When the specified number of games have been consumed without any replay (2) winning, replay (3) winning or bonus winning during RT1, the game is controlled to the initial gaming state.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is arranged on any of the pay lines. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus.

  When the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus is controlled until 12 games are consumed or 8 times. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  After the regular bonus is won internally, the gaming state is controlled by RT5 described above until the selected regular bonus is won.

  Further, when the regular bonus is won, after the regular bonus is finished, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a freeze state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible for a certain period of time. In addition, when the regular bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are disabled except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated.

  Also, after the regular bonus ends, the gaming state is controlled to RT1 until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. RT1, which is controlled after the regular bonus is over, continues until a big bonus or regular bonus is won, a replay (2) or a replay (3), which will be described later, is won, or 800 games as a prescribed number of games are consumed. Controlled.

  Since RT1 is controlled until a maximum of 1000 games are consumed after the end of the big bonus and until a maximum of 800 games are consumed after the end of the regular bonus, it can be said that RT1 is a gaming state that occupies most of the game.

  Even if one of the big bonus and regular bonus is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, There will be no winnings. This is because the symbols (“black 7”, “net 7”, “white 7”) constituting the big bonus and the regular bonus are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combination includes a single piece, melon, black cherry, and grape. One winning combination is won when a combination of “grape-net 7-net 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out. “Grape” of the left symbol constituting one piece is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L. On the other hand, the “net 7” of the middle and right symbols constituting one piece is not arranged within five frames in each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if a single winning combination is won, it can be said that the winning combination cannot be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing.

  A melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” or “melon-melon-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When melon wins, 12 medals are paid out. The symbols constituting the melon (“melon”, “BAR” in the right reel 2R) are not arranged within 5 frames on each reel. Therefore, even if the melon is won, it can be said that it cannot be won if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing.

  The black cherry is awarded when a symbol of “black cherry” is derived to one of the winning lines for the reel 2R, and one medal is paid out. If the black cherry symbol stops at the upper or lower stage of the right reel 2R, black cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2, L5 or the winning lines L3, L4. Since the black cherry was won on the winning line, two medals will be paid out.

  The design of the reel 2R that constitutes the black cherry ("black cherry") is not arranged within 7 frames on the reel 2R, so the stop switch 8R must be operated at an appropriate timing at which the "black cherry" can be drawn. It can be said that even if they are elected, they do not win.

  Grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is available on any of the winning lines. When grapes win, 10 medals are paid out. The symbols constituting the grape (“grape”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, it can be said that grapes can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are selected.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying combination includes replay (1), replay (2), and replay (3). When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets that you no longer need to set in the next game This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) will be awarded when one of the combinations of “banana-banana-banana”, “BAR-banana-banana”, and “black 7-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Become. The symbols constituting Replay (1) (one of “banana”, “BAR”, “black 7” in the left reel 2L, “banana” in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R) are 5 frames in each reel) Is located within. Therefore, it can be said that the replay (1) can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the player is elected.

  Replay (2) is awarded when one of the combinations of “melon-grape-grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The left symbol ("melon") that constitutes the replay (2) is arranged within 7 frames in the left reel 2L, and the middle and right symbols ("grape") that constitute the replay (2) are respectively middle. The reels 2C and 2R are arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, it can be said that the replay (2) is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R as long as the left reel 2L is first stopped as long as it is selected.

  When winning a replay (2), the gaming state is controlled by RT2 until winning a replay (3) or winning a bonus. Even when winning a replay (2), if RT4 or RT5 is controlled by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus, the RT4 or RT5 is not controlled without controlling RT2. Control is continuously performed. In RT2, the probability of winning the replay is higher than in RT1.

  Replay (3) is awarded when one of the combinations of “cherry-grape-grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The left symbol ("cherry") constituting the replay (3) is arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L, and the middle and right symbols ("grape") constituting the replay (3) are respectively center The reels 2C and 2R are arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, it can be said that the replay (3) is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R as long as the left reel 2L is first stopped as long as it is selected.

  When winning the replay (3), the gaming state is controlled by RT3 until the bonus is won. Even if the player wins the replay (3), if the RT4 or RT5 is controlled by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus, the RT4 or RT5 is not controlled without controlling the RT3. Control is continuously performed. In RT3, the probability of winning the replay is higher than in RT1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the combination of the lottery object combination and the gaming state read out as the lottery object role will be described. In the present embodiment, the combination of the lottery target combination varies depending on whether the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT1 to RT7, or RB. The big bonus and the regular bonus can be read simultaneously with each of a plurality of winning combinations including a small combination and replay, which will be described later, as a lottery target combination, and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 15, “+” is written between winning winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery.

  Further, the numerical value in parentheses shown in the gaming state column in FIG. 15 shows an example of the number of determination values used for the internal lottery when the lottery object combination is read out. In addition, for the lottery target combination whose number of determination values is not shown in the gaming state column in FIG. 15, for example, the number of determination values is determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets, and the set value. An internal lottery is performed using numbers.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state or RT1, each bonus of Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + Group A, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Group B, Big Bonus (3 ), Big Bonus (3) + Group B, Regular Bonus, Regular Bonus + Group A, Melon, Melon + 1 Role, Black Cherry, Grapes, Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2) , Replay (1) + Replay (3) are targets for internal lottery and are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  It should be noted that the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus can be read and won simultaneously with each combination of the A group. Each combination of group A refers to each of one combination, melon, melon + 1 combination, black cherry, grape, and replay (1) shown in the lower column of FIG. Therefore, each of the big bonus (1) + A group includes the big bonus (1) +1 piece, big bonus (1) + melon, big bonus (1) + melon + 1 piece, big bonus (1) + black A combination of cherry, big bonus (1) + grape, big bonus (1) + replay (1) is read to indicate that an internal lottery is performed. In addition, each bonus of Regular Bonus + Group A includes Regular Bonus + 1 Bonus, Regular Bonus + Melon, Regular Bonus + Melon + 1 Bonus, Regular Bonus + Black Cherry, Regular Bonus + Grape, Regular Bonus + Replay (1) Indicates that an internal lottery is performed.

  On the other hand, the big bonus (2) and the big bonus (3) can be read and won simultaneously with each combination of the B group. Each combination of group B is shown in the lower column of FIG. 15, one combination, melon, melon + 1 combination, black cherry, grape, replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay ( Each of 1) + replay (3). Therefore, each of the big bonus (2) + B group is the big bonus (2) +1 piece, big bonus (2) + melon, big bonus (2) + melon + 1 piece, big bonus (2) + black Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Grape, Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1) + Replay ( 3) Each combination is read and an internal lottery is performed. The big bonus (3) + B group includes the big bonus (3) +1 piece, the big bonus (3) + melon, the big bonus (3) + melon + 1 piece, the big bonus (3) + black Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Grape, Big Bonus (3) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (1) + Replay ( 3) Each combination is read and an internal lottery is performed.

  When the gaming state is RT2, each bonus of Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + Group A, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Group B, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) Group B + Regular Bonus, Regular Bonus + Group A Group, Melon, Melon + 1 Sheet, Black Cherry, Grapes, Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (3) It becomes a target and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT3, each combination of Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + A Group, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Group B, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) Each role in + B group, regular bonus, regular bonus + each group in group A, melon, melon + 1 sheet role, black cherry, grape, replay (1) are subject to internal lottery, and are subject to internal lottery Read sequentially.

  When the gaming state is RT4 or RT5, each combination of Big Bonus (1) + Group A, each combination of Big Bonus (2) + Group B, each combination of Big Bonus (3) + Group B, each combination of Regular Bonus + Group A , Melon, melon + 1 combination, black cherry, grape, and replay (1) are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as subject combinations for internal lottery. As shown in the related items section of Big Bonus and Regular Bonus in FIG. 14, when a bonus is won such as during RT4 or RT5, the combination of lottery roles including the big bonus and regular bonus is selected for internal lottery. Even when the winning combination is read and won, the winning flags of other winning combinations that are read simultaneously are set without setting the bonus winning flag again.

  When the gaming state is RT6 or RT7, each combination of Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + A Group, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Group B, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Group B, Regular Bonus, Regular Bonus + Group A, Melon, Melon + 1 Sheet, Black Cherry, Grapes, Replay (1) are subject to internal lottery and internal lottery It is sequentially read as a role. When the gaming state is RT4 to RT7, the replay (2) or the replay (3) is read simultaneously with either the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3). For this reason, in the game in which the winning combination including the replay (2) or the replay (3) is read out as a target for the internal lottery in the case of RT4 to RT7, the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) has already been won. Since the game has been won or the game has been won at the same time and is controlled by RT4 or RT5, even if the game is won by replay (2) or replay (3), it is not controlled by RT2 or RT3.

  Here, RT4 and RT5 are compared with RT6 and RT7. In RT6 and RT7, big bonuses (1) to (3) and regular bonuses are each read out as a lottery target and an internal lottery is performed, and big bonuses (1) to (3) and regular bonuses are each Is different from the corresponding RT4 and RT5 before the transition to the setting change mode in that the winning flag of the bonus is set when the winning combination is read as a lottery object. However, RT6 and RT7 are the same as the corresponding RT4 and RT5 before transition to the setting change mode with respect to the winning combination of the small role or replay.

  When the gaming state is a regular bonus, a single winning combination, melon, melon + 1 winning combination, black cherry, and grape are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as subject roles for internal lottery. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15, a one-piece combination is not read out alone as a lottery target combination in a gaming state other than during the regular bonus.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not winning of the lottery subject to be read (derivation of the winning display result) is permitted is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2 is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). , To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for the combination of lottery targets determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and roles determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value Depending on the situation. In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery increases as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  Next, paying attention to the number of re-gamer determination values in FIG. 15, the re-game role winning probability is compared for each gaming state. The re-playing role can be read and won by itself, and can be read and won simultaneously with the special role. Here, for example, it is assumed that, for example, “4” is set as the total number of determination values when only replay (1) is read simultaneously with the bonus. Also, for example, “26” is set as the total number of determination values when Replay (1) + Replay (2) or Replay (1) + Replay (3) is read simultaneously with the bonus.

  First, the probability of winning one of the replays (1) to (3) in the initial gaming state and each of RT1 to RT5 is as follows from the total number of judgment values assigned to replays (1) to (3): become.

When in an initial gaming state (30 + 8980) / 65536 = 9010/65536
When RT1 (30 + 8998) / 65536 = 9028/65536
When RT2 (30 + 40656) / 65536 = 40686/65536
When RT3 (30 + 44500) / 65536 = 44530/65536
When it is RT4 (30 + 25004) / 65536 = 25034/65536
When it is RT5 ... (30/16388) / 65536 = 16418/65536
From these, in this embodiment, the probability of winning one of the replays (1) to (3) is highest when it is RT3, and decreases in the order of RT2, RT4, RT5, RT1, and the initial gaming state It can be said that it is set to be the lowest when. That is, in this embodiment, the replay winning probability is set so that RT3>RT2>RT4>RT5>RT1> initial gaming state. Thereby, there exists an effect which is demonstrated below.

  When each of the big bonus (2) and the big bonus (3) is won, the RT4 is controlled. Also, the big bonus (2) and the big bonus (3) can be won simultaneously with the replay (2) and the replay (3), respectively, which are transferred to RT2 or RT3 by winning. For this reason, in the game won for either the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3), the player can win the replay (2) or the replay (3).

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the replay winning probability of RT2 is used as a reference, the difference in the replay winning probability of RT2 and RT4 is (40686 / 65536-25034 / 65536) = 15652/65536. The difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT5 is (40686 / 65536-16418 / 65536) = 24268/65536. As a result, the difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT4 is smaller than the difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT5, so the RT4 replay winning probability is the RT2 replay winning probability compared to RT5. It can be said that it is set to be close. Also for RT3, similar to RT2, the difference in the replay winning probability between RT3 and RT4 is smaller than the difference in the replay winning probability between RT3 and RT5, so the RT4 replay winning probability is compared to RT5. It can be said that it is set to be close to the replay winning probability of RT3.

  For this reason, in the game after winning the replay (2) or replay (3), the RT4 state by the bonus winning that can be won simultaneously with the replay or the RT2 or RT3 by the replay (2) or replay (3) winning However, since it is difficult for the player to recognize which state the player is in, the player can be expected to win the bonus.

  By the way, when all types of bonuses are won, if the replay winning probability is close to RT2 or RT3, the player will have a sense of expectation for the bonus winning if the replay winning probability is not improved. In other games than the player who won the replay (2) or the replay (3), the player cannot feel fun.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus not won simultaneously with the replay (2) and the replay (3) is won, the internal lottery is performed with a lower probability than when the replay winning probability is RT4. Controlled by RT5 to be performed. Therefore, even if you have not won any of Replay (2) or Replay (3) and you have not won the Replay as much as during RT4, you will win the Big Bonus (1) or Regular Bonus. The player can have a sense of expectation for being.

  For example, when both the RT2 replay winning probability and the RT1 replay winning probability that occupies most of the game are used as a reference, the difference between the RT2 and RT5 replay winning probabilities is (40686 / 65536-16418 / 65536) = 24268/65536 Thus, the difference in the replay winning probability between RT5 and RT1 is (16418 / 65536-9028 / 65536) = 7408/65536. Thus, the difference in the replay winning probability between RT5 and RT1 becomes smaller than the difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT5. For this reason, the replay winning probability of RT5 is set to be closer to the replay winning probability of RT1 compared to RT2.

  For this reason, when the replay (2) or replay (3) is not won, and the replay winning status is closer to the replay winning status during RT1, for example, when the replay winning status is not in RT4 However, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the initial game state, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, and RT5 have different replay winning probabilities. However, in the initial gaming state, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, and RT5 have the same replay winning probability, but the winning probability of at least one of the replays (1) to (3) is different from the other states. May be included. For example, for the initial gaming state, the replay (1) determination value number is “9000”, the replay (1) + replay (2) determination value number is “600”, and replay (1) + replay (3). The number of determination values is set to “100”, and for RT1, the number of determination values for replay (1) is “9650”, and replay (1) + replay (2) and replay (1) + replay (3). The number of determination values may be set to “25”. In this case, the initial game state and RT1 have the same replay winning probability, but the probability of winning each of replay (2) and replay (3) can be made different. For RT2, the replay (1) determination value number is “40000”, the replay (1) + replay (2) determination value number is “0”, and the replay (1) + replay (3) determination value. The number is set to “656”, and for RT3, the replay (1) determination value is “40656”, and the replay (1) + replay (2) and replay (1) + replay (3) determination values are set. The number may be set to “0”. In this case, RT2 and RT3 have the same replay winning probability, but the probability of winning replay (1) and replay (2) can be made different.

  Next, attention is paid to the winning probabilities of replay (2) and replay (3) to be transferred to RT2 and RT3 in the replay. The probability of winning either Replay (2) or Replay (3) is the highest in the initial gaming state, based on the total number of judgment values assigned to Replay (2) and Replay (3). , RT1, RT4 and RT5 are set in this order, and when RT3 is set, the lowest is set.

  In RT2, the winning probability of replay (3) is set to be higher than in RT1. Thus, it can be said that RT2 is more advantageous to the player than RT1 in that RT2 is more likely to be controlled to RT3 having the highest replay winning probability by winning by winning Replay (3).

  In the initial gaming state, the winning probability of replay (2) is set to be higher than when RT1 is set. From this, the initial gaming state is that it is easy to be controlled by RT2 where the winning probability of the replay (3) is high and the winning probability of the replay (3) is high by winning the replay (2) and winning. It can be said that this is a more advantageous state for the player than RT1. As described above, the initial game state is controlled when 800 games or 1000 games are consumed without any replay (2) winning, replay (3) winning, and bonus winning during RT1. For this reason, expectation to be controlled to RT2 can be raised by controlling to an initial game state. In addition, when the bonus is not controlled by RT2 or RT3 and neither bonus is generated, it is not possible to obtain an advantageous gaming state over a long period of time by controlling to the initial gaming state and easily controlling to RT2. The player can be easily rescued.

  In the regular bonus, the number of determination values (58486) is set so that the winning rate in the regular bonus is much higher than that in the initial gaming state.

  When winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. If a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role has been won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role win indicating that the general role has been won. Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are 1 to 21 (see FIG. 1) from the reel reference position. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  In the state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the winning combination is a small role (for example, melon, grapes, etc., also referred to as a normal small role in the following) whose number of medals to be paid out by winning a prize is 3 or more. In the event that a special role and a normal small role are simultaneously elected, the number of draws will be determined so that the selected normal small role will be drawn to the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames. For the stop operation position where the selected normal role cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames, the number of drawn frames will be determined so that the selected special role will be drawn into the winning line within the range of 4 frames. A stop control table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to align and stop the regular small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line, control is performed to align and stop them. If it is not possible to withdraw the normal small roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames may be aligned and stopped on the pay line. If possible, a control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the normal small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the normal small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, by giving a special role after winning a normal small role first, a medal can be awarded by winning a normal small role as compared with a case where a special role is given priority over a normal small role. Since the special combination can be won after being acquired, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination winning, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed.

  For example, when a special combination and a melon with a payout number of more than 3 are selected, reel control is performed preferentially by 9 melons by winning the special combination before the special combination is won, which is advantageous to the player. . When a special combination and a normal small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the normal small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the normal small combination.

  On the other hand, in the state where the special combination has been carried over from before the previous game, the number of medals to be paid out by winning a prize is smaller than the number of bets (for example, 3) (one combination, black cherry, etc.) When a special role is selected or when a special role and a specific small role are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the specific small role. Only when there is not, the reel stop control is performed so that the specific small combination is won. In other words, the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the winning special role is drawn to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum, and the stopping operation that does not allow the winning special role to be drawn to the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames. With regard to the position, a stop control table in which the number of drawn frames is determined so as to draw the selected specific small combination to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you can't withdraw a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a specific small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line Then, the control is performed so as to stop all the same, and the winning combination which is not won is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the specific small combination, and the specific small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. As a result, a special role is given a higher priority than a specific special role, so that a specific special role is also given a higher priority than a special role. In order to make it easier for a special role to win a special role in that game than to win a special role in the selected game and pay out less than the number of medals, do not reduce the player's medal as much as possible before winning the special role. Reel control that is advantageous to the player is performed. When a special combination and a specific small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the special combination is drawn, and the specific small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  Here, an example of each reel control will be described in the case where the special combination and the normal small combination are won simultaneously, and in the case where the special combination and the specific small combination are selected simultaneously.

  First, an example of reel control when a special combination and a normal small combination are won simultaneously will be described. Here, the big bonus (2) is won as a special role, grapes are usually won as a small role, and the "banana, grape, net 7" in the area numbers 8 to 10 on the left reel 2L stops. “Banana / Grape / Net 7” in the area numbers 4 to 6 of the right reel 2R is stopped, the big bonus (2) is tempered on the pay line L3, and the grape is tempered on the pay line L1 The reel control of the reel 2C will be described. In this case, if the stop switch 8C is stopped at the timing when any of the symbols of the area numbers 1 and 18 to 21 of the middle reel 2C is positioned at the lower stage, the “grape” symbol is theoretically drawn into the winning line L1 and stopped. Although it is possible to stop the drawing of the “net 7” symbol on the winning line L3, in the present embodiment, the reel control is performed to stop the “grape” symbol of the area number 14 or 19 on the winning line L1. It is. In this way, priority is given to the control for aligning the regular small combination on the winning line over the special combination.

  Next, an example of reel control when a special combination and a specific small combination are won simultaneously will be described. Here, a big bonus (2) is won as a special role, a single role is elected as a specific small role, and “banana / grape / net 7” of area numbers 8 to 10 on the left reel 2L. Stop and “Black 7 / Net 7 / Grapes” in the area numbers 17 to 19 of the middle reel 2C are stopped, the big bonus (2) is tempered on the winning line L5, and the single character is tempered on the winning line L1. Next, the reel control of the right reel 2R will be described. In this case, if the stop switch 8R is stopped at the timing when any of the symbols of the area numbers 8 to 11 of the right reel 2R is located at the lower stage, theoretically, the “net 7 It is possible to stop the drawing, but in the present embodiment, reel control is performed to stop the “net 7” symbol of area number 6 on the winning line L5. In this way, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the specific small combination.

  If multiple types of small roles are elected at the same time (such as melon + 1), draw the maximum number of winning small roles into the winning line so that they can be drawn to the maximum of 4 frames. In addition to the number of frames that have been set, for the stop operation position where a small role with a large number of payouts among the selected small roles cannot be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, the number of payouts is small among the selected small roles A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames is determined so as to draw a small role to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a small combination with a large number of payouts can be stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the combined small combination can be stopped. If control is performed and a small combination with a large number of payouts cannot be drawn on the winning line with a maximum of 4 frames, the small number selected on the winning line with a maximum of 4 frames If a small combination with a small number of payouts can be aligned and stopped, the combination is controlled to be stopped, and the winning combination is controlled to be stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. It will be. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It becomes possible to win a few small roles. When a plurality of types of small combinations with different payout numbers can be drawn at the same time, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, so that a plurality of types of small combinations are not aligned on the winning line at the same time.

  When a normal small role, a specific small role, and a special role are simultaneously elected (Big Bonus (1) + Melon + 1 Sheet Role, etc.) The number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to draw the maximum in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected normal small role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames in the winning line, the winning special role is 4 frames in the winning line The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 frames on the pay line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within a range of is prepared, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop the regular small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning line is stopped. If you can't withdraw a normal small role that was won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames above, if you can stop the special role won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and align it, If the special control that was won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line cannot be drawn on the winning line and the specified small role won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line is stopped. If they can be controlled, the control for stopping them together is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the regular small part on the winning line, and in the case where the normal small part cannot be drawn, priority is given to the control for aligning the special part on the winning line. It is possible to win a specific small role only when there is no such item. As a result, for example, when the big bonus (1) + melon + 1 winning combination is won, the reel control for winning the melon is prioritized, and the big bonus (1) is given when the melon cannot be won. The reel control for winning is performed with priority, and the reel control for winning a single winning combination is performed when the big bonus (1) cannot be won.

  Next, the special role and the re-playing role are won at the same time, such as when the re-playing role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and the re-playing role are won simultaneously In the case (Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), etc.), a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the selected re-gamer is drawn to the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames. Then, reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  Further, when a plurality of types of replaying players are simultaneously won (replay (1) + replay (2), etc.), for example, replaying players to be transferred to RT (replay (2) or replay (3)). For the stop operation position where the number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn into the winning line within the range of 4 frames, and the re-gamer to be transferred to RT cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames Then, a stop control table in which the number of draw-in frames is determined so that the other re-game players (replay (1)) are drawn to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the winning replay (2) or replay (3) can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, this is aligned. If the replay (2) or replay (3) selected in the winning range within a maximum of 4 frames cannot be drawn on the winning line, the replay (1) is controlled and stopped. It is.

  Next, the reach eyes will be described. The reach in this embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any of bonuses (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), regular bonus) is won. Say. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of reach eyes are provided. In the plurality of types of reach, for example, a display mode in which “black 7 / cherry / black 7” in the area numbers 17 to 19 of the left reel 2L is stopped and no winning combination is generated (hereinafter referred to as the first reel) And the display mode (hereinafter referred to as the second reach) in which the “Grape / Black 7 / Cherry” in the area numbers 16 to 18 of the left reel 2L is stopped and no winning combination is generated. included. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the first reach and the second reach as an example of the reach. The reach eyes are not limited to the first reach eye and the second reach eye, but may be provided with three or more kinds, and are composed of one reel symbol such as the symbol of the left reel 2L. Not only a thing but the thing which consists of a combination of the design of each of several reels among reels 2L-2R may be sufficient.

  Here, the reel control related to the derivation of the reach will be described. When none of the bonuses is won, as a rule, reel control is performed to stop symbol combinations other than the plural types of reach.

  Even if none of the bonuses are won, if the winning combination (grape, replay (3)) is won regardless of the stop timing, the symbol combination of the winning combination is selected as the winning line. As a result of the reel control to be stopped upward, there may be a case where the same output as that forming a part of the reach is stopped in any one of the reels 2L to 2R.

  For example, even when none of the bonuses are won, when the replay (3) having the “cherry” symbol of area number 18 as the constituent symbol is won (for example, replay (1) + replay (3 )), At least as long as the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the replay (3) can be won regardless of the stop timing. Therefore, the region number 17 that constitutes a part of the first reach in the left reel 2L. There are cases where reel control is performed to stop “Black 7 / Cherry / Black 7” of No. 19 to No. 19. In such a case, if the replay (3) is not won, the reach is stopped and the bonus is won.

  Even when none of the bonuses are won, when a grape having the “grape” symbol of area number 16 is selected alone, the grape can be won regardless of the stop timing. Therefore, there is a case where the reel control is performed to stop “Grape / Black 7 / Cherry” in the region numbers 16 to 18 constituting a part of the second reach in the left reel 2L. In such a case, if the grapes are not won, the reach is stopped and the bonus is won.

  Next, when one of the bonuses is won alone and when one of the bonuses is won with a small combination or a re-playing combination, reel control capable of stopping a plurality of types of reach is performed.

  For example, the reel control capable of stopping the first reach is performed only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won, as shown in FIG. It is not performed when winning big bonus (2) or big bonus (3). For this reason, when the first reach is stopped, it is possible to notify the player that the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus among the bonuses is won.

  In the present embodiment, “black 7 / cherry / black 7” of region numbers 17 to 19 constituting a part of the first reach in the left reel 2L is a big bonus (1) or regular among bonuses. The reel control is performed so as to stop only when the bonus is won or when the replay (3) is won (including the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) simultaneous winning). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16B, when “black 7, cherry, black 7” of the region numbers 17 to 19 constituting a part of the first reach in the left reel 2L is stopped. At that time, regardless of whether or not the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are stopped, it is determined that the bonus is won or the player is controlled to RT3 advantageous to the player by winning the replay (3). Become. Accordingly, when “black 7, cherry, black 7” of the region numbers 17 to 19 constituting a part of the first reach in the left reel 2L is stopped, the bonus or the replay (3) to be shifted to RT3 is stopped. It becomes impossible for the player to specify which is won, but it is possible for the player to recognize early that it is controlled to any advantageous state before stopping the reel that is rotating, improving the interest of the game be able to.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won internally, the stop switch 8L can be stopped at the stop position where the left reel 2L can stop the “black 7, cherry, black 7” of the area numbers 17-19. Is operated, reel control is performed so that “black 7, cherry, black 7” in the region numbers 17 to 19 is drawn. However, when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won internally and one winning combination is won, the area number constituting a part of the second reach described later on the left reel 2L When the stop switch 8L is operated at the stop position where the “grape / black 7 / cherry” of 16-18 can be stopped, the “grape / black 7 / cherry” of the area numbers 16-18 are drawn. Reel control is performed.

  On the other hand, when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won internally, the left reel 2L is stopped at a stop position where the area numbers 17 to 19 “black 7, cherry, black 7” can be stopped. Even when the switch 8L is operated, unless the replay (3) is won at the same time, “black 7 / cherry / black 7” of the area numbers 17 to 19 is not drawn, for example, the first reach Stop “Cherry / Black 7 / Grape” in the area number 18-20 in front of the eye and “Banana / Grape / Black 7” in the area number 15-17 in the area after the second reach. Reel control is performed. Such “cherry black 7 grapes” in the area numbers 18 to 20 immediately before the first reach, and “banana grapes” in the area numbers 15 to 17 after the second reach.・ "Black 7" is an outcome that can be stopped even if the bonus is not won internally. Therefore, even when all reels are stopped, if the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) is won internally, the above-mentioned items appear even when the bonus is not won. Therefore, the reel control is performed so that the reach that can recognize that the bonus is won internally does not appear. Therefore, when the bonus is won, the first reach is greater when winning the big bonus (1) or when winning the regular bonus than when winning the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3). The probability of being stopped increases.

  The first reach is shown as an example of the reach that is stopped only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won. However, the reach that is stopped only when the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won out of the bonuses is not limited to the first reach, and a plurality of types may be set. Good. As a result, the probability that the reach will be stopped when the bonus is won is larger than the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) when the winning bonus is the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus. Higher when you win the bonus. On the other hand, when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won, the RT4 is controlled such that the replay winning probability is higher than when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won. For this reason, when winning the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3), compared to when winning the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, the replay is won with a high probability and reach However, it is difficult for the player to notice that the bonus is won.

  In addition, when the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) is won internally, the outcome that appears even if the bonus is not won (the first reach eye or the second reach left) The example in which the reel control is performed so that a reach that recognizes that the bonus has been won internally does not appear because the appearance of the one frame shift compared to the symbol of the reel 2L appears. When the stop switch 8C and the stop switch 8R are operated at specific timings so that specific symbols are stopped on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, they are not stopped when the bonus is not won. The reel control may be performed so that the reach is stopped. The reach in this case may be, for example, a display mode in which “black 7-white 7-net 7” is stopped on the winning line.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 16C, the reel control capable of stopping the second reach is performed only when a bonus is won simultaneously with one winning combination, and when the bonus is won. However, it will not be performed if one winning combination is not won simultaneously. That is, in a game in which a bonus is won simultaneously with a single winning combination, reel control capable of stopping the second reach is performed, and in a game in which a bonus winning after the game is over is carried over, The reel control is performed to stop the symbol combination including the reach eyes other than the reach eyes. This makes it possible to stop the game-limited reach in which the bonus and one winning combination are won simultaneously.

  In addition, when “Grape / Black 7 / Cherry” in the region numbers 16 to 18 constituting a part of the second reach eye in the left reel 2L is stopped, While expecting that a replay (3) winning with “cherry” as a constituent symbol will not occur, the spinning reel can be stopped and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As an example of the reach that is stopped only when the bonus is won together with one winning combination, the above second reach is shown, but it is stopped only when the bonus is won together with one winning combination. The reach reach is not limited to the second reach, and a plurality of types may be set. As a result, even when the bonus is won, different reel control is performed depending on whether or not a single winning combination is won simultaneously, so that the reach can be changed variously according to the internal winning situation. it can.

  Next, reel control when winning a melon will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the winning situation when winning a melon is, for example, melon alone, any bonus + melon, melon + 1 piece combination, any bonus + melon + 1 piece combination . When a melon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line, control is performed to align the melon combinations on the winning line.

  In addition, in the reel control when winning a melon, when the melon alone or any bonus + melon is won, the stop operation position where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line Among them, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of melons can be aligned only with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 and the stop operation position where it can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L5. Controls to align the melon combination with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, can only align the melon combination with the winning lines L4 and L5, and cannot stop aligning with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 Only when the stop operation is performed at the operation position, the control is performed to align the melon combination with the pay lines L4 and L5.

  On the other hand, in the case where a melon + 1 piece combination, any bonus + melon + 1 piece combination is won, the combination of melons among the stop operation positions where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line is selected. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that can be aligned only with the pay lines L4 and L5 and the stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the pay lines L1 to L5, the combination of melons is selected as the pay line L4. , L5 can be controlled so that the combination of melons can be aligned only to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and only when the stop operation is performed at the stopping operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L4 and L5. Is controlled to match the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  That is, when a melon alone or any bonus + melon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the melon combination can be drawn into the winning line, the melon combination is selected as the winning line L4, L5. Priority is given to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and the melon + 1 or any bonus + melon + 1 winning is selected, and the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, control is performed so that the combination of melons is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  With such a configuration, when melon alone or any bonus + melon is selected, there is a high possibility that the combination of melons will be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and either melon + 1 character combination If the bonus + melon + 1 winning combination is won, there is a high possibility that the combination of melons is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. In other words, when melon wins when melon alone or any bonus + melon is won, and when melon wins when melon + 1 piece or any bonus + melon + 1 piece wins Then, reel control is performed to change the winning line where the combination of melons is easy to match.

  In addition to the reel control as described above, in the internal lottery, melon, any bonus + melon winning ratio compared to the ratio of any bonus + melon winning probability to the total value of melon winning probability +1 piece role, any bonus + melon + melon + any number of bonuses + melon The number of determination values is set so that a lottery of melon + 1 sheet combination, any bonus + melon + 1 sheet combination is performed. For example, when the gaming state is the initial gaming state or any of RT1 to RT7, the determination value number when the melon alone is read as the lottery target combination is “900”, and the big bonus (1) + Melon, Big Bonus (2) + Melon, Big Bonus (3) + Melon, and Regular Bonus + Melon + 28 is the total number of judgment values when melon is read The number of judgment values is “25”, big bonus (1) + melon + 1 piece, big bonus (2) + melon + 1 piece, big bonus (3) + melon + 1 piece, and regular bonus + melon + 1 It is assumed that the total number of determination values when the combination is read is set to “25”.

  In this case, the total number of judgment values when the melon and one hero are read out alone is 900 + 28 = 928, and the ratio of any of the bonuses being read out at the same time is 28 / 928≈3% It becomes. On the other hand, the total number of determination values when melon and one-piece combination are simultaneously read out of melon and one-piece combination is 25 + 25 = 50, and the ratio of any of the bonuses being read out at the same time is 25 / 50 = 50%. As a result, the percentage of winning a bonus with a bonus is higher when a melon and one winning combination are winning at the same time than when a melon and one winning combination are winning alone. Therefore, there is a change in the player's expectation for winning the special role depending on whether the winning line with the combination of melons is winning line L1, L2, L3 or winning line L4, L5. Can be made.

  In addition, even if the winning line with the combination of melons is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may be won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the line of winning lines, and the player's expectation that a special role has been won will be lost in any winning line. There is no end to it.

  In this embodiment, when melon alone or any bonus + melon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of melons Is controlled to match the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4 and L5, and the melon + 1 or any bonus + melon + 1 winning is selected, and the combination of melons is won When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be drawn into the control line, control is performed so that the melon combination is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. , Melon alone or one of the bonus + melon is won, and in the stop operation position where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line When the stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the melon combination only to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and the melon + 1 combination or any bonus + melon + 1 combination is selected, and the melon combination is selected. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be drawn into the pay line, control may be performed so that the combination of melons is aligned with only the pay lines L4 and L5.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, melon alone or any bonus + one bonus plus the ratio of melon winning probability to the total value of melon winning probability, and melon + 1 bonus combination or any bonus + Melon + any one of the bonuses + melon + one-piece winning probability ratio to the total value of winning probabilities of melon + one-piece winning melon, any bonus + melon, melon + melon + one-piece winning, either Bonus + melon + one-piece lottery, melon alone or one of the bonus + melons is won, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line , Melon + 1 piece combination or any bonus + melon + 1 piece combination is elected, it is possible to draw the combination of melons to the winning line The player's expectation for winning the special role depends on the difference of the winning line with the combination of melons by controlling the winning line to be preferentially aligned with the case where the stopping operation is made at a different stop operation position. However, in the internal lottery, the winning probability of either bonus + melon + 1 piece winnings in the total value of winning probability of melon alone or any bonus + melon + 1 winning combination Melon alone, either bonus + melon with a probability that the ratio of melon + one piece or any bonus + the ratio of the winning probability of melon to any bonus + melon winning probability is different , Melon + 1 piece, any bonus + melon + 1 piece lottery, melon alone or any bonus + melon + 1 piece If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line, and a combination of melon + 1 sheet or any bonus + melon is selected, the combination of melons is selected By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different between when the stop operation is made at the stop operation position that can be drawn into the winning line, the special role depends on the difference in the winning line that has a combination of melons. You may make it have a change in the expectation degree of the player with respect to winning.

  On the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed as described above, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a prize is generated. It becomes. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is transferred as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, an original effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, but is sent from the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. Various effects are performed based on the above-described commands related to the progress of the game.

  In order to perform the performance, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing winning status, combination of display results derived to reels 2L, 2C, 2R, information indicating presence / absence of winning, game state applied in game running on game control board 40 ( The winning situation and the gaming state are also provided in the RAM 91c twice.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92, a game according to the gaming state and the stage described above There is a production.

  The game production is the demonstration production described above, the continuous production that informs whether or not the bonus is won, and after the fact that the bonus is won and the bonus line is given priority over the bonus. Reproduction that is controlled to be drawn in, chance effect that informs that it is a chance timing to win a bonus without winning a normal small role, bonus effect that is executed until the game state ends after winning the bonus, RT effect executed when the gaming state is controlled to one of RT1 to RT3, information advantageous when the gaming state is controlled to one of RT1 to RT3 (for example, winning status, winning combination) A navigation effect for notifying an operation procedure for winning a prize) and a normal effect performed in the initial gaming state. It should be noted that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM.

  The sub control unit 91 executes the RT effect based on the game state command from the main control unit 41. The RT effect is different from the normal effect and in accordance with the type of RT (the color of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the appearing character, the sound effect / game sound output from the speakers 53, 54, the effect) The lighting pattern of the effect LED 52 is different). Thereby, it can be made easy for a player to recognize that RT1 to RT3 are controlled and the type of RT being controlled. The RT effect includes an RT start effect informing that the control to each of RT1 to RT3 has been started.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs an RT1 start effect for notifying that the RT1 has been started when it is specified that the game state command is RT1. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 notifies that the RT2 has started when the RT2 is specified from the gaming state command and it is informed that the RT2 is controlled by the continuous effect. To do. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 notifies that the RT3 has started when the RT3 is specified from the gaming state command and it is notified that the RT3 is controlled by the continuous effect. To do.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 executes a continuous effect, a chance effect, and a navigation effect based on the internal winning command and the game state command received from the main control unit 41.

  The continuous production starts on the condition that one of the replay (2) and the replay (3) is won, and after performing the production to develop a series of stories over a predetermined number of games (for example, three games), This is an effect of notifying information on whether a bonus is won as an ending or controlled by RT. The timing for starting the continuous production in the present embodiment will be described with respect to an example in which the game won in the replay (2) or the replay (3) is finished, but is not limited to this, and the replay (2) or the replay ( Any timing can be used after the winning of 3), for example, the timing at which the game won by replay (2) or replay (3) is started, the predetermined timing in the game, It may be the timing when the next game is started. Replay (2) and Replay (3) can be won at the same time as Big Bonus (2) and Big Bonus (3), respectively, and even if the Big Bonus is not won, it becomes an opportunity to control to RT2 or RT3 by winning The winning combination is to win as long as the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time when winning. For this reason, it is determined that the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) has been won or the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) has not been won by the continuous performance. It is possible to ask whether or not it is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the continuous effect may be an effect that starts on the condition that one of the replay (2) and the replay (3) is won, and has the same effect as described above. The timing for starting the continuous production on the condition that one of the replay (2) and the replay (3) has been won is the timing at which the replay (2) or the replay (3) is won. Often, it may be when a medal is inserted to set the number of bets for the next game after the winning game, or when the next game after the winning game is started.

  For example, the player-side character wins, for example, by developing a story in which the player-side character and the enemy character fight and notifying whether the player-side character wins or loses as an end result. By doing so, the bonus winning may be notified, and it may be notified that the player side character has been transferred to RT2 or RT3 by losing. When the player-side character wins, a character corresponding to the winning bonus may appear to notify the type of the winning bonus. When the player-side character is defeated, the controlled RT type may be notified by causing a character corresponding to the controlled RT type to appear. A plurality of types of effects are provided as continuous effects. The effect mode of the continuous effect is, for example, at least one of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the appearing character, the sound effect / game sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting pattern of the effect effect LED 52, and the like. These aspects are set differently. As will be described later, the effect is determined by the sub-control unit 91 and executed in the effect.

  In addition, in the chance effect, after the fact that the bonus is won by the continuous effect is notified, the bonus is not given in the replay that is preferentially drawn over the bonus in the reel control or the game that is not won in the normal small role. This is an effect to notify that it is a chance timing to win a prize. As the chance effect, for example, it may be notified by causing a character corresponding to the winning bonus to appear.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the player's operation on the touch panel. In the history display effect, the game history is not simply displayed as information, but the sub CPU 91a further performs an operation for advancing the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L). 2C and 2R except for the case where the game is from the start to the stop of the rotation), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  These effects are controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display an effect image under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each of a plurality of types of stages, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the stage at that time. Will be. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM in advance.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  Next, a process executed by the main control unit 41 and a process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game processing one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must first be in a state where the game can be progressed. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or after the mode is changed to the setting change mode by operating the reset / setting switch 38 or the setting key switch 37.

  As described above, after the transition to the setting change mode, the gaming state before the transition to the setting change mode is maintained. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized.

  For example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT1, the RT1 replay winning probability is maintained even after the mode change mode is changed, and the remaining number of games of RT1 is also taken over.

  In addition, when a transition is made to the setting change mode during RT4 or RT5, the winning flag is initialized, the winning probability of the small role or replay is maintained, and when the bonus is read and won, the bonus winning flag is set. Controlled by RT6 or RT7.

  When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ).

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. In the lottery process, when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won, a process for controlling to RT5 is performed, and when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won, the process is controlled to RT4. Processing is performed. It should be noted that RT4 and RT5 do not end even if they win the replay (2) or replay (3), but end when they win the winning bonus.

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor 32L is set on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. , 32C, 32R are driven, and rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started and stopped, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively. When the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won in the first game after the bonus ends, the game is played until a predetermined time elapses after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated. Any operation of the player is invalidated and controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for being controlled to the frozen state at the start of the first game after the bonus ends.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-mentioned role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning determination command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90.

  Also, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that the big bonus or regular bonus is won, RT4 or RT5 is ended and the big bonus or regular bonus is controlled.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9.

  Various processes not related to winning are also performed. For example, in the payout process, a process for counting the number of payouts when the small bonus is generated when the big bonus is controlled, and the counted number is predetermined to satisfy the end condition. It is determined whether or not the number has been exceeded. If the number has been exceeded, processing relating to end control of the big bonus is performed. In the payout process, when the regular bonus is controlled, a process for counting each of the number of winnings and the number of games that have been won, and the number of winnings or the number of games counted satisfy the termination condition. When the value to be reached is reached, processing related to the regular bonus end control is performed. Further, in the payout process, a process of carrying over the winning flag of the special combination stored in the special work until the special combination wins is performed. As described above, the special combination winning flag stored in the special work is initialized when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  When it is determined in the payout process that the big bonus or the regular bonus has ended, the specified number of games is set in the RT1 counter to control to RT1. In addition, when RT1 is in progress, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of games in RT1 in the payout process, and when it becomes 0, RT1 is terminated. When RT1 is completed by digesting the prescribed number of games, a process for controlling to the initial game state is performed in the payout process.

  Further, in the payout process, it is determined whether or not the replay (2) has been won in the initial game state or RT1, and when it is determined that the replay (2) has been won, the process of controlling to RT2 is performed. Do. In the payout process, it is determined whether or not the replay (3) has been won when it is in the initial gaming state, either RT1 or RT2, and when it is determined that the replay (3) has been won, RT3. The control process is performed. Also, in the payout process, when the replay (2) or the replay (3) is won and controlled by the RT2 or the RT3, the production waiting time (for example, according to the winning of the replay (2) or the replay (3) (for example, Until 5 seconds), a process is performed so as not to shift to the next process. Thereby, the sub-control unit 91 performs an effect of notifying that the continuous effect is started by winning the replay (2) or the replay (3) as part of the continuous effect while the effect waiting time elapses. Thereby, it can be surely notified to the player that the continuous production is started and a sense of expectation can be given. RT2 and RT3 are ended when the bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 performs the transition of the game state among the initial game state, RT1 to RT7, the big bonus, and the regular bonus. In response, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. In contrast, the sub-control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state at the time of power supply stop, Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms), the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller, Production control interruption processing is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various effects such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 are performed. In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends. In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 performs a game effect execution process for executing the above-described game effect according to the game state or the like.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are timing charts for specifically explaining the continuous effect that is started when the replay (2) or the replay (3) is won. In each of FIGS. 17 and 18, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time, and from the top of the vertical axis, the (a) column indicates the game situation, the (b) column indicates the gaming state, and (c) The game effect is shown in the column. Note that the circled numbers shown in the lower column in FIGS. 17 and 18 indicate the timings in (a) to (c). Hereinafter, timing 1 to timing 3 are simply indicated by numbers. FIG. 17 illustrates the case where the replay (1) + replay (2) is won, and FIG. 18 illustrates the case where the big bonus (2) + replay (1) + replay (2) is won.

  First, referring to FIG. 17, timing 1 indicates the timing at which replay (1) + replay (2) is won. Timing 2 indicates the timing of winning the replay (2) in the game started at timing 1. At timing 2, as shown in the column (b), the gaming state is shifted to RT2 based on winning the replay (2). Further, at the timing 2, as shown in the column (c), the above-described continuous production is started based on winning the replay (2).

  More specifically, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the replay (2) or the replay (3) has been won based on the winning determination command. The process for starting the continuous production is performed. The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the replay (2) or the replay (3) has been won based on the internal winning command. You may comprise so that the process which starts may be performed.

  When the sub-control unit 91 starts the continuous performance, the condition (replay (2) or replay (3)) that triggered the execution of the continuous performance was won at the same time as the big bonus, or at the same time as the regular bonus. The effect mode of the continuous effect is determined according to the distribution ratio according to whether or not only the replay (1) is won at the same time, and the continuous effect of the effect mode is executed. As a result, it is predicted whether the big bonus or the regular bonus is won or the big bonus or the regular bonus is not won and only the RT2 or the RT3 is controlled based on the effect mode of the executed continuous effect. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Timing 3 indicates the timing at which three games have been consumed since the continuous performance was started at timing 2. Between timing 2 and timing 3, an effect of developing the series of stories described above is performed. Further, at timing 3, as shown in the column (c), it is notified that RT2 is controlled as RT notification by the appearance of a character corresponding to RT2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a case where the big bonus (2) + replay (1) + replay (2) is won will be described.

  Timing 1 shows the timing of winning big bonus (2) + replay (1) + replay (2). At timing 1, as shown in the column (b), the gaming state is shifted to RT4 based on winning of the big bonus (2). Timing 2 shows the timing of winning the replay (2) in the game started at timing 1. Further, at the timing 2, as shown in the column (c), the above-described continuous production is started based on winning the replay (2).

  Timing 3 indicates the timing at which three games have been consumed since the continuous performance was started at timing 2. At the timing 3, as shown in the column (c), it is notified that the big bonus (2) is won as a bonus notification by the appearance of a character corresponding to the big bonus (2).

  The replay winning probability of RT4 in the present embodiment is set to be closer to the replay winning probability of RT2 compared to RT5 that is transferred when the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won. . For this reason, the winning situation of the replay is more similar to that during RT2 than during RT5. Therefore, when the winning status of the replay during the continuous performance is about the same as during RT2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won. As a result, when the winning status of the replay during the continuous performance is high, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the result.

  On the other hand, the RT5 replay winning probability transferred when the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won is set to be closer to the RT1 replay winning probability than RT4. For this reason, the winning situation of replay is more similar to that during RT1 than during RT4. Therefore, even when the continuous performance is not performed, and even if the winning status of the replay is the same level as during RT1, it is expected to be expected to win the big bonus (1) or regular bonus Can do.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) In the embodiment described above, when the replay winning probability of RT2 is used as a reference, the difference in the replay winning probability of RT2 and RT4 is 15652/65536, whereas the replay winning probability of RT2 and RT5 The difference is 24268/65536. As a result, the difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT4 is smaller than the difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT5, so the RT4 replay winning probability is the RT2 replay winning probability compared to RT5. It is set to be close. Similarly, since the difference in the replay winning probability between RT3 and RT4 is smaller than the difference in the replay winning probability between RT3 and RT5, the RT4 replay winning probability is equal to the RT3 replay winning probability compared to RT5. It is set to be close. For this reason, if the replay winning probability has improved after winning the replay (2) or replay (3), is it simply winning the replay (2) or replay (3), or whether the bonus was won simultaneously? Can be made difficult for the player to understand, and the player can have a sense of expectation that the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won.

  In addition, the replay (2) or the replay (3) winning is started to control RT2 and RT3, and continuous effects are executed over three games. This makes it easier to win a replay that is reel-controlled so that the bonus is given priority over the bonus while the continuous performance is being executed. For this reason, by reducing the possibility of winning a bonus during the continuous performance, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3), and It is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the continuous performance.

  In addition, when both the replay winning probability of RT2 and the replay winning probability of the initial gaming state are used as a reference, the difference between the replay winning probability of RT2 and RT5 is 24268/65536, and the replay winning probability of RT5 and the initial gaming state is The difference is 7408/65536. Thus, the difference in the replay winning probability between RT5 and the initial gaming state is smaller than the difference in the replay winning probability between RT2 and RT5. Similarly, the replay winning probability of RT5 is set so as to be closer to the replay winning probability of RT1 or the initial gaming state than RT2.

  For this reason, when the replay (2) or the replay (3) has not been won, the replay winning status is not generated as much as when the replay winning status is, for example, RT4, and the replay during RT1 or the initial game state is not performed. Even when it is close to the winning situation, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, when 1000 games or 800 games are consumed in RT1, it is controlled to the initial game state in which the winning probability of replay (2) and replay (3) is increased. For this reason, it is possible to improve expectation for being controlled by RT2 or RT3, and to easily relieve a player who has not won a bonus during RT1.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, in the initial gaming state and RT1, winning the replay (2) greatly improves the winning probability of the replay (1) and increases the winning probability of the replay (3). It can be expected to be controlled to improve RT2. In addition, after being controlled to RT2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the winning probability of replay (1) is controlled to RT3 that is further improved than RT2 by winning the replay (3). For this reason, an expectation can be raised in steps and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, even when no bonus is won, when the replay (3) is won, at least as long as the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, it is related to the stop timing. Since the replay (3) can be won, the reel control for stopping the outcome ("black 7 / cherry / black 7") constituting a part of the first reach can be performed as a result. For this reason, the opportunity which makes the expectation with respect to having won the replay (3) and a bonus can be increased by stopping the turn which comprises a part of 1st reach eye.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the reel control capable of stopping the first reach is performed only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus among the bonuses is won. This is not done when (2) or Big Bonus (3) is won. As a result, the probability that the reach will be stopped when the bonus is won is larger than the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) when the winning bonus is the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus. Higher when you win the bonus. As a result, even when the reach is not stopped, the player is expected to win the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) with a low probability that the reach will be stopped. Can do.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won, the replay winning probability is higher than when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won. Controlled by RT4. For this reason, when winning the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3), compared to when winning the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, the replay is won with a high probability, and as described above. Thus, it is difficult to stop the reach eye, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the bonus is won. Also, since the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won simultaneously with the replay (2) or the replay (3) that triggers the start of the continuous production, the continuous production can be started when the winning is won. Thereby, the production effect by continuous production can be improved, and a player can be made to pay attention to the result of continuous production further.

  On the other hand, when the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won, the probability of winning a replay is lower than when the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) is won. Since the reach eyes are easily stopped, it is possible to easily notify the reach eyes that the bonus has been won.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the reel control is performed to stop the symbol combinations other than the reach eyes in the game where the bonus is not won. Further, only in the game in which one winning combination is won at the same time as one of the bonuses, reel control capable of stopping the second reach among the reach is performed. On the other hand, in a game in which the bonus winning is carried over after the game in which one winning combination is won at the same time as one of the bonuses is performed, the symbol combination including the reach reach other than the second reach is stopped. The reel control is performed. For this reason, first, different symbol combinations can be stopped depending on whether or not the game is won for the bonus, and in the game that is won for the bonus, the game that is simultaneously won for one bonus combination Different symbol combinations can be stopped depending on whether or not. As a result, the combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning situation can be changed in various ways, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, even in a game where a melon is won, different reel control is performed depending on whether or not a single winning combination is won at the same time. For this reason, the symbol combination which can be stopped according to an internal winning situation can be changed more variously, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  More specifically, when melon alone or one of the bonuses + melon is selected and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of melons can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of melons is won. Reel control that preferentially aligns the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 over the lines L4 and L5 is performed, and the melon + 1 or any bonus + melon + 1 winning combination is won, and the combination of melons is won When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, reel control is performed so that the combination of melons is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. As a result, when melon is won when melon alone or any bonus + melon is won, and when melon + 1 piece or any bonus + melon + 1 piece is won, melon wins In this case, reel control is performed so that the winning line where the combination of melons is easy to match is different.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the internal lottery, either melon alone or any bonus + any bonus + melon winning probability ratio occupying the total value of the melon winning probability, Any bonus + melon + melon + one piece winning ratio of any bonus + melon + one piece winning hero, the probability of the winning probability of any bonus + melon + one piece winning is high, The number of determination values is set so that one of the bonus + melon + 1-sheet combination is drawn. This will increase the percentage of melons and singles winning at the same time as one of the bonuses when melons and singles are winning at the same time than when melons are winning alone. Therefore, the player's expectation for winning the special role is changed depending on whether the winning line with the combination of melons is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. be able to.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, in a game where a normal bonus with a payout of medals of 3 or more bets is won when the big bonus or the regular bonus is won, Reel control can be performed in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small role is preferentially derived, and the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus or regular bonus is derived in the subsequent game. On the other hand, in a game in which a specific small role with a payout of medals less than 3 is won when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won, a symbol combination corresponding to the specific small role It is possible to perform reel control in which a symbol combination corresponding to a big bonus or a regular bonus is preferentially derived. As a result, the winning of the normal small role is not hindered by the big bonus or the regular bonus, and it is possible to easily increase the number of medals owned by the player by winning the normal small role before the big bonus or regular bonus winning. . Even if a prize is won, only a medal less than the number of bets is paid out, and a big bonus or a regular bonus can be won in preference to a specific small role that reduces the number of medals owned by the player. As a result, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that symbol combinations resulting in an unfavorable game result for the player are preferentially derived, and it is possible to preferentially derive symbol combinations resulting in a game result advantageous to the player. it can.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which reach eyes can be stopped when any bonus is won. However, the display mode is not limited to this, and can be stopped even when one of the bonuses is won or when a predetermined winning combination other than the bonus (for example, black cherry) is won (hereinafter referred to as a chance chance). ) May be set. Hereinafter, a case where black cherry is set as an example of the predetermined winning combination will be described.

  For example, a display mode in which “black 7 / cherry / black 7” in the region numbers 17 to 19 of the left reel 2L is stopped and no winning combination is generated (here, the first chance item) And a display mode (here, referred to as a second chance eye) in which “Grape / Black 7 / Cherry” in the area numbers 16 to 18 of the left reel 2L is stopped and no winning combination is generated. It is. Then, when one of the bonuses is won or when the black cherry is won, the reel control may be performed such that the chance eye can be stopped. As a result, even when no bonus is won, when the black cherry is won, the reel control for stopping the chance eye can be performed. Further, as described above, the black cherry is a role that does not win even if it is won if the stop switch 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing. As a result, when the chance is stopped and no winning combination is won, it is assumed that a bonus is won or a black cherry is simply missed without winning a bonus. For this reason, when the chance is stopped, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the tension with respect to whether or not the bonus is won.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the reel control capable of stopping the first reach is performed only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus among the bonuses is won. (2) or don't play when the big bonus (3) is won, the probability that the reach will be stopped is greater than the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) won Or, an example where the probability of winning a regular bonus is higher is explained. However, the probability that the reach will be stopped is configured to be higher when the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) is won than when the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won. Also good.

  Thus, when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won, the replay winning probability is controlled to RT5 lower than when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won, Reach eyes are difficult to stop. In addition, the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus are not won simultaneously with the replay (2) or the replay (3) that triggers the start of the continuous production, so the replay (2) or the replay (3) is won. Continuous production is not started. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus have been won, and as a result, the winning big bonus (1) and the regular bonus suddenly wins. It can be increased, and the game interest can be improved by surprise the player.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the reel control capable of stopping the first reach is performed only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is selected as the bonus, and the big bonus is included in the bonus. (2) By avoiding when the big bonus (3) is won, the probability that the reach will be stopped will be the big bonus (1) or regular bonus won and the big bonus (2) Or, an example in which the big bonus (3) is different from that at the time of winning was described. However, the specific method for differentiating the probability that the reach will be stopped when the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won and when the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) is won is not limited to this, Any thing is acceptable.

  For example, out of the stop timings that can theoretically draw reach, the proportion of stop timings that can actually pull reach reaches the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, and the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) The probability that the reach is stopped may be made different by setting the number of frames to be drawn differently at the time of winning. Further, for example, with respect to a reach that is established when a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped on one pay line, the reach is aligned on one pay line. Reach eyes are stopped by setting the number of drawn frames so that the probability of stopping is different between winning the big bonus (1) or regular bonus and winning the big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) You may comprise so that a probability may differ. Similarly, in the case of such a configuration, when the reach eye is not stopped, the player can have a sense of expectation that a bonus with a low probability that the reach eye will be stopped is won.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, an example in which the replay winning probability in RT2 and RT3 is set to be higher than the replay winning probability in RT4 will be described. did. However, the replay winning probability of each of RT2 to RT4 is not limited to this, for example, the replay winning probability of each of RT2 to RT4 may be the same, and the replay winning probability in RT4 is higher in RT2 and RT3. It may be set to be higher than the replay winning probability. Also by this, the effect in embodiment mentioned above is show | played similarly.

  In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 15, the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus are not read simultaneously with the replay (2) and the replay (3), and are not won simultaneously. explained. However, each of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus is read simultaneously with the replay (2) and the replay (3) and can be selected at the same time, for example, the big bonus (1) + B group and the regular bonus + B group The combination may be read and an internal lottery may be performed. In this case, the big bonus (2) has a higher probability than the probability that each of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus will be won simultaneously with the replay (2) and the replay (3) (for example, the number of judgment values is “1”, etc.). As long as the number of determination values is set so that each of the big bonus (3) is won simultaneously with the replay (2) and the replay (3). Also by this, the effect in embodiment mentioned above is show | played similarly.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the continuous effect is executed when winning the replay (2) or the replay (3) has been described. However, the trigger for executing the continuous effect is not limited to this. The reasons for executing the continuous performance are, for example, winning a big bonus (1) or regular bonus, winning a specific winning combination (for example, a single winning combination, etc.), and winning by a predetermined random lottery. There may be. As a result, even if the replay occurrence frequency is not as high as when it is RT2 to RT4, the continuous effect is executed, so that it is expected that the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is effectively won. It can make you feel. In addition, what is necessary is just to comprise so that it may alert | report whether the big bonus (1) or a regular bonus is won as a result of a continuous production. Thereby, a player can be paid attention to the result of continuous production, and the interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, when comprised in this way, when the conditions for performing a continuous effect again are satisfied during a continuous effect, the sub-control part 91 may be made to perform the process which updates a continuous effect. By updating the continuous performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big bonus or a regular bonus has been won again.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, in a game where a special role is won and a game where the payout number is a normal small role with 3 or more bets, it corresponds to the normal small role. In a game where a combination of symbols is preferentially derived and a special combination is selected and a specific small combination with a payout number less than 3 is selected, the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific combination The example of performing the reel control in which the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus or the regular bonus is derived in preference to the above has been described. In addition to such reel control, the following reel control may be performed.

  When an equivalent small combination with the same number of medals as the number of bets and a special combination are elected, for example, reel control may be performed to preferentially win an equivalent small combination over a special combination. Thereby, the next game can be started with the medals that are awarded to the equivalent small role and paid out, and the player can be expected to win the normal small role in the game. Further, when the equivalent small combination and the special combination are elected, the reel control may be performed so that the special combination is preferentially won over the equivalent small combination. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of games and medals required for winning a special combination.

  In addition, the number of medals to be paid out changes according to the number of winning lines, such as black cherry. For example, for special small roles that may be less than the number of bets or more than the number of bets, When a special role is elected, the special small role is given priority over the special role when it is operated with an operating procedure that allows the special small role to be won so that the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets. The special role is given priority over the special small role when it is operated according to an operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded only so that the number of bets to be paid is less than the number of bets. Reel control may be performed so as to win a prize. Thereby, taking into account the operation procedure, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player is derived, and the display result that is advantageous to the player is given priority. Can be derived.

  (7) The normal small combination and the specific small combination in the above-described embodiment may be simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination for lottery. In this case, for example, when a special small role and a specific small role are elected in a state where the special role winning is carried over, the special role, the normal small role, and the specific small role are selected. At the same time, it will be a winning situation. In this case, the reel control is performed so that the normal small role is preferentially won over the special special role and the specific small role. The reel control may be performed so that the reel control is performed to win a specific small combination when the normal small combination and the special combination cannot be won. As a result, even when the normal small combination and the specific small combination are won at the same time, it is possible to reduce the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player as much as possible, which is advantageous for the player. A display result as a game result can be preferentially derived.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, the special bonus includes the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the big bonus (3), and the regular bonus. The symbols (combination of symbols) composing each of these four types of bonuses are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. As a general rule, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are set at an appropriate timing. Combinations that cannot be won if not operated are set, and the four types of bonuses are set so that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time, that is, to stop the combination of symbols to be awarded. The operation procedures are configured not to overlap each other.

  In addition, the number of operation procedures for deriving each of a plurality of types of bonuses, the number of games for which a continuous effect is executed, and the bonuses and other special winnings are derived preferentially while the continuous effect is being executed. By adjusting the number of winning games in the design to be selected for the preferential winning role (replay, normal small role), the percentage that the winning bonus is won during the continuous performance is as low as possible It is comprised so that it may become. The designed number of winning games may be calculated by, for example, (the winning probability of a preferential winning combination in a gaming state during execution of continuous effects) × (the number of games of continuous effects).

  For example, as described above, the big bonuses (1) to (3) and the regular bonus do not overlap with each other in the operation procedure for stopping the combination of symbols to be awarded. It can be said that it is theoretically possible to win the winning bonus if there are four games.

  In the above-described embodiment, 3 is set as the number of games for executing a continuous effect. For this reason, in the embodiment described above, if ignoring winning of the preferential winning combination is ignored, it is possible to win the winning big bonus while executing the continuous performance with a probability of 3/4 = 75%. It can be said that it is theoretically possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even during execution of a continuous effect, the player wins a priority winning combination with a predetermined probability according to the gaming state during the execution of the continuous effect, and the priority winning is over the bonus. The reel control is performed so that the winning combination is preferentially derived. For example, when the winning probability of replay and the winning probability of a normal small role are set so that the number of winning games designed for winning a preferential winning role during a continuous performance is 1.2, The number of games for which reel control for preferentially deriving bonuses is not performed during execution and the number of games for which reel control is performed is (number of games for continuous production) − (number of winning games in design) = 1.8 It becomes a game, and the operation procedure becomes smaller than 4 which is a bonus type that does not overlap each other. Therefore, when the designed number of winning games is set to 1.2, the probability of winning a bonus while the continuous effect is being executed is 1.8 / 4 = 45%.

  In addition, for example, when the winning probability of replay and the winning probability of a regular small role are set so that the number of winning games designed to win a preferential winning role during continuous performance is 1.5, The number of games that have not been won in the preferential winning combination while the performance is being executed is (number of games of continuous production) − (number of winning games in design) = 1.5 games. Therefore, when the number of winning games in the design is set to 1.5, the probability of winning a bonus while the continuous performance is being executed is reduced to 1.5 / 4 = 37.5%. The Thereby, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the winning bonus is won while the continuous performance is being executed.

  As mentioned above, by adjusting the number of winning games in the design to win the preferential winning role while running the continuous performance, the percentage of winning the winning bonus during the continuous performance The example which can reduce is demonstrated. However, the method of reducing the rate at which the winning bonus is won during continuous performance is not limited to this, for example, increasing the number of types of bonuses whose operation procedures do not overlap each other. The ratio described above may be reduced by increasing the number of operation procedures for deriving the bonus, and the ratio described above may be reduced by reducing the number of games for executing the continuous performance. May be.

  As an example of increasing the number of bonus types whose operation procedures do not overlap each other, for example, when the number of bonus types whose operation procedures do not overlap each other is five, the number of winning games in design is 1.2. If it is set, the probability of winning a bonus while the continuous performance is being executed is reduced to 1.8 / 5 = 36%. Further, when the number of winning games in design is set to 1.5, the probability of winning a bonus while the continuous effect is being executed is reduced to 1.5 / 5 = 30%.

  At least the number of bonus types whose operation procedures do not overlap each other is greater than the number of games for which reel control is performed to preferentially derive a bonus of (number of consecutively produced games)-(designed winning game number). As described above, the number of types of bonuses whose operation procedures do not overlap with each other, the number of games that execute a continuous effect that informs whether or not the bonus is won, and the bonus during the execution of the continuous effect Also, any game may be used as long as it is adjusted with the number of games designed to win the preferential winning combination. As a result, the number of types of bonuses whose operation procedures do not overlap each other is smaller than the number of games for which reel control is performed to preferentially derive a bonus of (number of games for continuous production) − (number of winning games in design). Compared with the slot machine set to be, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the winning bonus is won while the continuous production is being executed. As a result, the expectation for winning the bonus can be maintained for a long time while the continuous performance is being executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a continuous production started by winning a bonus or a specific replay is being performed, the above-described RT is controlled and the replay winning probability is improved. For this reason, in the internal winning situation where a bonus for which a bonus may be won during a continuous performance is won, the winning game in terms of design is compared to when the internal winning situation is not won for a bonus. The number can be further increased. For this reason, the feeling of expectation for the bonus winning while the continuous performance is being executed can be maintained for a longer time.

  In addition, as a gaming state when the continuous effect is executed, for example, a state where a bonus is won and controlled by RT, a state where a bonus is won and not controlled by RT, and a bonus is won. There is a slot machine that is shifted to one of a plurality of states including a state controlled by RT and a state where a bonus is not won and is not controlled by RT. Also, in such a slot machine, the number of winning games in design differs depending on the gaming state when the continuous effect is being executed. In this case, for example, in any of a plurality of game states when the continuous production is being executed, the number of bonus types in which the aforementioned operation procedures do not overlap each other is (number of games of continuous production) − ( The number of winning games in design and the number of games in continuous production so as to satisfy a predetermined relationship that is larger than the number of games in which reel control is performed to preferentially derive a bonus that is a winning game in design) A slot machine in which at least one is adjusted is desirable. In such a slot machine, the expectation for winning the bonus can be maintained for a long time regardless of the gaming state during the continuous performance. In addition to such a slot machine, it is designed so that the predetermined relationship is satisfied only when the gaming state when the continuous performance is executed is at least a predetermined state among a plurality of states. A slot machine that does not satisfy the predetermined relationship when at least one of the number of winning games and the number of games of continuous effects is adjusted and is in a state other than the predetermined state may be used. In such a slot machine, when the gaming state during the continuous performance is at least a predetermined state, it is possible to maintain a long-awaited expectation for winning the bonus.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the type of the winning combination is notified by the navigation effect has been described. However, the content notified by the navigation effect is not limited to this, and may be a notification of the reel stop order and the operation timing for winning or not winning the winning combination. Thereby, the kind of navigation effect can be made rich.

  (10) In the industry where the slot machines in the above-described embodiments are distributed, inspection (type test) by a third party is obligated at the pre-shipment stage, and the predetermined standard is satisfied in the type test. There is a special situation that only the determined model is allowed to be shipped to the game hall. Further, in recent years, in order to prevent the shooting ability from being increased too much, it is required to be able to perform a test assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by a player. Yes.

  Therefore, in the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, in consideration of such special circumstances and needs, a test is performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. “Output means” for outputting “information that can be performed” may be further provided. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 19, the game control board, the effect control board, and the input / output board will be described as an example of “output means”, and the recommended operation procedure information will be referred to as “the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. As an example of “information that can be tested on the assumption that a game is played”. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine equipped with a test apparatus 1200 for performing a type test and an input / output board 1100 for inputting / outputting test information used for the test.

  The test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes, as shown in FIG. 19, winning status information for specifying the game start and winning status, and the rotational positions of the reel motors 32L to 32R (for example, Recommendations that are expected to be actually operated by the player in consideration of the rotational position information for specifying the step number of the predetermined position, the area number of the symbol located in the lower stage, etc., the presence or absence of navigation effects, etc. The recommended operation procedure information for specifying the operation procedure is included. Note that the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning information for specifying that a winning has occurred and the type of the winning, payout information for specifying that a medal has been paid out, and the like. , Other information included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the test information input from the test apparatus 1200 to the slot machine 1 includes game start information for starting a game such as setting a bet number and reel rotation for starting a game, reels, and the like. The game end information for ending the game such as stopping the game is included.

  The input / output board 1100 mounted on the slot machine 1 includes a connector 1101 for electrically connecting to the game control board 40, a connector 1102 for electrically connecting to the effect control board 90, and a test apparatus 1200. A connector 1103 for electrical connection is provided. The type test described above is performed by inputting / outputting various types of information in a state where the input / output board 100 and the test apparatus 1200 are connected by a connector. Hereinafter, the flow and operation of various information when the type test is performed will be specifically described.

  First, the test apparatus 1200 outputs game start information in order to start a game in the slot machine 1. The game start information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, the process for starting a game (betting number setting, lottery process, reel rotation process, etc. in the BET process) is performed.

  And the main control part 41 of the game control board 40 produces | generates and outputs winning condition information at the time of a game start. The corresponding selection status information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can specify that the game has started and the winning situation.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 generates and outputs rotational position information according to the reel rotation. The rotational position information is information for specifying a step existing at a predetermined position among 168 steps of each of the reel motors 32L to 32R, for example, and is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the current rotation position can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 generates and outputs recommended operation procedure information according to the winning situation or the like. The recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the recommended operation procedure can be specified.

  Based on the current rotation position of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information, the test apparatus 1200 provides game end information for stopping each of the reels 2L to 2R in the recommended operation procedure specified from the recommended operation procedure information. Generate and output. The game end information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped according to the game end information, and a process (reel rotation process, winning determination process, payout process, etc.) for ending the game is performed. Do. Thereby, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  As described above, information is repeatedly input / output between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100, and the game can be automatically repeated. As a result, the type test for the slot machine 1 can be automatically performed.

  As described above, the recommended operation procedure may be information for enabling the test to be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. For example, the recommended operation procedure is an operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by a game effect (for example, a chance effect) that informs information related to the winning situation. When the game effect for notifying the information related to is not performed, a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing the small part missing, so-called DDT hitting method, KKK hitting method, etc.) may be used.

  Specifically, the recommended operation procedure is a bonus in which a symbol combination to be actually stopped when the chance effect described above is executed, and therefore, an operation procedure for deriving the combination of the bonus. Say. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, when the current rotation position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information becomes the position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the recommended operation procedure information, the corresponding reel The game end information for stopping the game is output. As a result, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure, and a bonus winning winning in the slot machine 1 can be generated.

  As a result, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, the recommended operation procedure for deriving the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by the game effect informing the information related to the winning situation is specified. can do. As a result, the type test can be performed based on the results of operation according to the recommended operating procedure, so the test should be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. Can do.

  In addition, the recommended operation procedure when the game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (in the case of including a predetermined small role that is missed by the operation procedure) It is also possible to use a procedure for minimizing missing, so-called DDT method, KKK method, etc. For example, it is conceivable that a player who has not recognized whether or not a bonus has been won usually performs a stop operation so that a predetermined small role can be won as much as possible. This is because it is possible to minimize the possibility of losing the selected small part that has been won. That is, the stop operation is performed so that the predetermined small role can be won, so that, for example, when the predetermined small role is won, it is more reliable when the predetermined small role is won. Can win a prize, and if you have not won a given small role and have won another small role (for example, a small role that has not been missed), you can pull in the selected small role, This is because the possibility of being missed can be minimized. Accordingly, for example, compared with an operation procedure in which a predetermined small role cannot be won, the possibility of losing a small role is reduced by performing a stop operation in an operation procedure for winning a predetermined small role. it can.

  It should be noted that the recommended operation procedure when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed may be an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting). This is because when the game effect is not performed, it is considered that the player can proceed with the game without pressing in consideration of speeding up the game. The recommended operation procedure information in this case is information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Thereby, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, even when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed, the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player The recommended operation procedure for deriving can be identified. As a result, since the type test can be performed based on the result of operation according to the recommended operation procedure, it is not during the so-called AT assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. You can also test for time.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure information that is output when a game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing a small part missing, so-called DDT batting method, KKK batting For example, the first information for specifying a method and the like and the second information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) may be output. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can perform a test when a game effect that informs information related to the winning situation is not performed using the first information or the second information as necessary. It is possible to perform a test when a game effect for notifying information related to the winning situation is not performed in a state closer to the case where the game is played by the player.

  The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and outputs data for specifying the region number for the left reel 2L, The second strobe signal is output, data for specifying the region number for the middle reel 2C is output, and further, the third strobe signal is output, and the data for specifying the region number for the right reel 2R. To complete the output of the recommended operating procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, the position where each reel should be stopped can be specified from the recommended operation procedure information, and the game end information is output in consideration of the rotation position specified from the rotation position information. Each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  When the recommended operation procedure includes the reel stop order, the sub control unit 91 outputs the first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example. Data for specifying an area number for the first reel to be stopped is output, a second strobe signal is output, data for specifying an area number for the second reel to be stopped is output, and 3 is output, and data for specifying the region number for the third reel to be stopped is output, thereby completing the output of the recommended operation procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, in addition to the recommended operation procedure information, the reel stop order can be specified in addition to the position where each reel should be stopped, and the rotational position specified from the rotational position information is taken into consideration. The game end information can be output and each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  Note that after the type test is completed, it is conceivable that an illegal act of inputting illegal information via the connector 1103 described above is performed. In order to avoid this, for example, the connector 1103 may be provided so as to be removable from the input / output board 1100, and the connector 1103 may be configured to be removable at the shipping stage. In the shipping stage, the input / output board 1100 may be shipped without being mounted. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as inputting unauthorized information.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the special combination and the small combination are won simultaneously has been described. The following may be used for combinations in which a special combination and a small combination are won simultaneously. Here, bonus (A) and bonus (B) are illustrated as special roles, and each of bonus (A) and (B) is a predetermined orange (combination of constituent symbols: orange-orange-orange) or plum. In the internal lottery, one of 15 small payouts such as (combination of structural symbols: plum-plum-plum) and one single payout such as 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be selected at the same time. An example will be described in which a big bonus and a small combination that are read out as a combination and are simultaneously read out can be won. The combinations that are read out as the lottery target are orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 ( 2) Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are included. The bonus (A) and bonus (B) may be the following combinations. For example, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (2) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the big bonus (3) in the above-described embodiment. Further, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the regular bonus in the above-described embodiment. Further, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the big bonus (2) in the above-described embodiment.

  These bonuses (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2), each symbol (combination of symbols) is 5 frames in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In principle, combinations that cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing are set.

  Furthermore, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the symbols (combination of symbols) that constitute each of the combinations of the symbols (1) are the maximum pull-in range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the combination of each one (1) are configured so that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  Further, a bonus (B), a plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and a symbol (a combination of symbols) that constitutes each role (2) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (B), the plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and the combination of one (2) are configured such that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, the orange (one) (1), the plum, and the symbols (combination of symbols) that make up each of the symbols (2) are arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames on a given reel. Therefore, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  The slot machine including such bonus (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2) as a winning combination further comprises the following configuration. May be.

  (11-1) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific role is missed, there is a suggestion that the specific role will be missed by stopping a specific stop mode that does not stop if none of the roles are elected. If the player does not know the specific stop mode that stops when he misses, he cannot know that he has missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether the particular role that was missed has been missed. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won and at the first stop (stop operation of any reel while all reels are changing) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange symbol cannot be drawn into the winning line, the control of pulling the plum role symbol into any of the winning lines is performed and the remaining reels In the case where the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the composition symbol of the orange part can be drawn into the winning line where the composition part of the plum part is stopped in FIG. Control to pull in.

  In addition, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) will be selected, and the constituent symbols for the Orange will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the constituent symbol of the orange part is changed to the winning line where the constituent part of the orange part is stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where the constituent symbols of the orange role were stopped at the time of the second stop because the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position that could not be withdrawn, When one reel is moving and the last reel is stopped), the orange line will be displayed on the winning line where the orange pattern is stopped at the first stop. If the stop operation at the stop operation position retractable configuration pattern is performed, thereby performing the control to draw a structure pattern orange combination the winning line stop structure symbol orange combination was at the first stop.

  In other words, even if orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the remaining symbols can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control to align a part of the combination with the winning line is performed.

  Also, if Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is missed at the first stop or the second stop Similar control is performed.

  Therefore, even if orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and orange is missed at the first stop or second stop When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position at which the structure of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, a part of the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning line. Even when the orange is missed at the time of 2 stops, it can be easily determined whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of orange matches the winning line. Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Has the same effect.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won, and the orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop. In the case of an error, the symbol that is used as an indicator (the structural symbol of the plum role when it is missed during the first stop, the structural symbol of the orange role that was stopped during the first stop when it is missed during the second stop) The stop position is regarded as a stop position where the structural symbol stops, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of orange combinations on the winning line, and a stop for stopping a part of the combination of orange combinations on the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop and the second stop. Since there is no need to prepare a separate control table, the stop control table is used even when control is performed to align a part of the combination of oranges with the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop or the second stop. Storage capacity can be reduced. The same applies to the case where a winning combination of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  (11-2) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the expectation was given to the winning of the special role according to the stopping mode of the small role, the stopping mode at the time of winning the single role of the small role is different from the stopping mode at the time of simultaneous winning of the small role and the special role. There is a problem that it can be determined from the player whether or not the special combination is won according to the mode, and the expectation is lost. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected at the stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange roles on the winning line.

  Among them, when orange and bonus (A) + orange are elected, among the stop operation positions where the combination of orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combination is selected as the winning line L1, L2, L3. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that can be aligned only to the winning line and the stop operation position that can be aligned to any of the winning lines L1 to L5, the combination of the orange combination is selected as the winning line L1, L2, L3. It is possible to align the combination of the orange combination only with the winning lines L4 and L5 and control the orange combination only when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2 and L3. Is controlled to match the winning lines L4 and L5.

  On the other hand, when orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, the combination of orange combinations can be drawn into the winning line. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5 and the stop operation position where the combination can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L5, the orange It is possible to align the combination of the winning combination with the winning lines L4 and L5, and the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. Only when the stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange combinations with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  That is, when orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combinations can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combinations is selected as the winning line L4, The winning line L1, L2, and L3 are prioritized over L5, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange roles is the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, the combination of the orange combination is controlled in preference to the winning lines L4 and L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  Similarly, when the plum, bonus (B) + plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the plums can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the plums is selected as the winning line L4, The winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are controlled prior to L5. Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected, and the combination of plum roles is the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, control is performed so that the combination of plums is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  With such a configuration, when orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are won, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned to the winning lines L1, L2, L3. If there is a high chance that Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are won There is a high possibility that the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. In other words, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, Orange and Plum win, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 ( 1) Plum + 1 piece (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 piece (2), winning line where the combination of orange or plum combination is easy to match when orange and plum wins Is different.

  After the reel control as described above is performed, in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + orange is higher than the ratio of the winning probability of orange + 1. (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) winning probability ratio of orange and bonus (1) A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1). Similarly, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) than the ratio of Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum winning probability to the total value of Plum winning probability Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + with the probability that the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) in the total value of winning probability will be higher Plot + 1 (2) lottery.

  As a result, when Orange and 1 sheet (1) are elected at the same time, both Orange and 1 sheet (1) are won at the same time as Bonus (A). The percentage increases, and when the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time, the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time as the bonus (B). As the winning ratio of the combination of oranges or plums is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5, the game for winning the special role Can change the expectation of a person.

  In addition, even if the winning line with the combination of orange or plum roles is the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may have been won. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the winning line where the roles are aligned, and the special role has been won regardless of the winning line. The player's expectation for the game will not be lost.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, and stops at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Stop operation position where orange + 1 combination (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is selected, and the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at, the combination of the orange combination or the plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. However, orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are selected, and a stop operation that can draw the combination of orange or plum combination into the winning line When the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line when the stop operation is performed at the position, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is set to the winning line L1, Controls aligning to L2 and L3 only, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are won If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line, It may perform control to align the combination of the winning pay line L4, L5 only.

  In this example, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (A) + orange to the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (the ratio of the winning probability of Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) in the winning value of Orange + 1 (1) is different) 1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange has been won, at the stop operation position where the combination of orange can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the active stop operation position, the player's winning for the special role is determined by the difference in the winning line with the combination of orange roles The degree of expectation can be changed, but in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) ( The ratio of the winning probability of 1) and orange + 1 (1), the bonus (A) + orange winning probability of the total value of the bonus (A) + orange winning probability is different from the orange, Lottery of bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange is selected. By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the winning combination can be drawn into the winning line, the winning line with the orange combined combination is controlled. Depending on the difference, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed. The same applies to the case of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2).

  (11-3) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific combination is missed, if there is no winning combination, there will be a change in the reel stop mode by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop. There is a problem that there is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when the specific combination is missed by performing the stop operation at the same timing, and the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  When the orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, the predetermined chance except for the orange combination or the plum combination is won. Priority is given to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 over the lines L4 and L5, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning line cannot be drawn into the winning line, control is performed so that the chance line is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3.

  Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line, a chance is won from the winning lines L4 and L5. Priority is given to the lines L1, L2, and L3. Plum +1 (2) and bonus (B) + plum +1 (2) are selected and the combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3.

  As a result, even if Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange is won, or Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the orange combination will be aligned on the winning line, but if orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, In other words, if only orange out of orange (1) is elected alone and the orange is missed, chances are high that the winning lines are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, orange + 1 (1), If the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) is won, that is, if both the orange (1) and 1 (1) win simultaneously and miss the orange There are likely to align in winning lines L4, L5. Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, or when Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of plums will be aligned on the winning line, but if Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected, In other words, if only one of the plums (1) (2) wins alone and loses the plum, chances are high that the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are aligned. If the bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won, that is, if both the plum (1) (2) wins and loses the plum at the same time, the chance will be placed on the winning lines L4 and L5. Possible It is high.

  As a result, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange or Plum is lost, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1 ), Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are won and the orange and plums are missed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels are stopped at the time.

  The chances are that Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum was won and Orange and Plum were missed, Orange +1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 (1) Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are controlled to be aligned to any of the winning lines on condition that the orange and plum are missed. When a combination or combination of combinations is not won, chances are not matched to any winning line. For this reason, the possibility of winning a special role is surely suggested by having chance chances on any of the winning lines.

  In this example, as described above, the bonus (A) when the orange and one sheet (1) are won at the same time is more than the case where the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. ) At the same time, the percentage of winning prizes will increase, and a bonus will be awarded when a plum and one piece (2) of the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time, rather than when the plum is won alone. B) Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time, the special line will be won depending on whether the winning line with the chance is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to give a change to the degree of expectation of the player.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may be won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with uniform eyes, and a player who wins a special role regardless of which winning line is matched The feeling of expectation will not be spoiled.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are lost, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 The winning line where the chances are easy to match will be changed when winning (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) and orange and plum are missed. However, chances 1 and 2 with different display modes are determined, and orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum is won and orange +1 is lost and orange +1 Sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 sheet (1), Plum + 1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 sheet (2) are selected and Orange and Plum are removed. And if spilled, in appearance and easy chance eyes of types may be changed.

  In this example, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, the chance is won at a higher rate than the winning lines L4 and L5. Controls aligning with the lines L1, L2, and L3, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When winning and dropping oranges and plums, control is performed to align the winning lines with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + If a Plum is won and the Orange or Plum is missed, the chances are aligned only to the winning lines L1, L2, L3 Control, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) wins and drops the orange and plum In such a case, the control may be performed so that the chances are aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5.

  In addition, in this example, when orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is won at the same time as bonus (A) than when orange and one sheet (1) are elected alone. The ratio of the winning combination is higher when the Plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the Plum and one piece (2) are won alone. By increasing the winning percentage, the player's expectation for winning the special role depends on whether the winning lines with the chances are the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5. For example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process proceeds to RT described later, and the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. 1st RT When the transition is made and the chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5, the first RT has an advantage (RT termination condition, winning probability of re-playing role, presence / absence of notification of winning role type or notification rate) It may be configured to shift to a different second RT. By adopting such a configuration, when orange or plum is missed, not only the display mode of the reels is diversified, but the same chance is also placed on the winning line. Even if the display mode is uniform, when orange and plum are elected alone, there is a possibility of transition when orange and plum are dropped, orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2) In the case where is elected, the advantage can be changed between orange and RT which may shift when a plum is dropped.

  (12) The RT is not limited to the types shown in the above-described embodiments, and may be controlled to a plurality of types of RTs having different probabilities of winning re-game players and different numbers of prescribed games. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player differs when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus ends and when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) ends. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) ends and the big bonus (3) or the regular bonus ends. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to which RT is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this way, when configured to be controlled to RT according to the type of bonus, the combination of bonuses that triggers control to RT is composed of different symbols for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel It may be. For example, the big bonus (1) may be “black 7-grape-melon”, the big bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-BAR”, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bonus is won when a bonus is won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, making it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the type of RT controlled after the bonus ends.

  Further, in the case of such a configuration, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is made larger than the area of the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight. You may install in the position which is easier to visually recognize than the window 3. FIG. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of bells is derived in the variable display device 2, “bell-bell-bell” may be stopped and displayed on a winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when any of the bonuses that trigger the above-described RT control is won, regardless of the type of the bonus that has been won, the common “on” winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. “7-7-7” may be stopped and displayed. This makes it difficult for a player who visually recognizes the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game and to determine which type of bonus has been won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the RT1 replay (2) winning probability and replay (3) winning probability controlled after the bonus ends are set so as to be lower than those in the initial gaming state. An example has been described. However, the replay (2) winning probability and replay (3) winning probability of the RT (hereinafter referred to as RTa) controlled after the bonus ends are set to be higher than those in the initial gaming state. It may be set. For example, the number of determination values for replay (2) and replay (3) in RTa is set to the number of determination values for replay (2) and replay (3) in the initial gaming state shown in FIG. The number of determination values for replay (2) and replay (3) in the gaming state to be controlled may be the number of determination values for replay (2) and replay (3) in RT1 shown in FIG. Thereby, when controlled by RTa, the probability of winning the replay (2) and the replay (3) is improved. Replay (2) and replay (3) can be won only at RTa, and are not won in gaming states other than the RTa (things that are not read out as lottery targets, and those with 0 judgment value) May be included).

  Furthermore, when the player wins the replay (2) when the player is RTa, the player has a higher probability of winning the replay (1) than the player when the player is RTa. When replay (3) is won when RTa, the probability of winning replay (1) is lower than when RTb, and even when replay (2) is won, it is disadvantageous for a player who is not controlled by RTb You may comprise so that it may control to RT (it is referred to as RTc here). As a result, when the player is controlled to RTa, the player is expected to win the replay (2) and controlled to the RTb, and feels uneasy about winning the replay (3) and controlled to the RTc. Compared with a slot machine that is not controlled by RTb or RTc, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The RTa includes a plurality of types of RTs having different probabilities of at least one of the probability of winning the replay (2) and the probability of winning the replay (3), and is determined in advance according to the type of bonus that has been completed. It may be configured to control RT (RTa at the end of the big bonus (1), RTa 'at the end of the big bonus (2), RTa "at the end of the big bonus (3), RTa"' at the end of the regular bonus, etc.). . Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of bonus is controlled, that is, whether the bonus is controlled to a type of RTa having a high probability of winning the replay (2). In addition, the player may have a different sense of expectation with respect to being controlled to a more advantageous RTa (RT having a high probability of winning Replay (2)) depending on the type of bonus to be controlled. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the same RT is controlled regardless of the type of bonus.

  Note that, in the case of the configuration as described above and as described in the modification example (12), the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is larger than the area of the transparent window 3 of the variable display device 2, and the player's When the replay (1) to replay (3) wins when the player is placed near the height of the line of sight and more easily visible than the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2, the winning replay Regardless of the type, a common “replay-replay-replay” may be stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. This makes it difficult for a player who views the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game and to determine which type of replay has been won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  In addition, the combination of symbols that trigger the control to RTb is not limited to the combination of symbols of winning combinations that improve the winning probability during RTa, but may be a combination of symbols of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations, Further, it may be a combination of a plurality of specific off-line symbols that are stopped and displayed on the winning line only when a predetermined winning combination is won. Depending on which of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations is won or which of a plurality of specified off-combination combinations is stopped, the specified number of games may be controlled to be different RTs.

  The plurality of predetermined winning combinations may be, for example, a plurality of winning combinations that increase the winning probability during a single bonus that is advantageous to a player who is awarded a single bonus and moves to the next one game. In this case, the symbol combinations of the single bonus and the predetermined winning combination may be composed of symbols different for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, “bell-replay-orange”, “replay-bell-bell”, and the like may be used. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a single bonus has been won and that a predetermined winning combination has been won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  (14) As an end condition of RT1 in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described that is established by using the prescribed number of games or winning a bonus. However, the end condition of RT1 is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that it is also established by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of RT end symbols. As a result, an unexpectedness such as sudden termination of RT can be added, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the above-described RT2 and RT3 may be configured to end by digesting a predetermined number of games. Furthermore, RT1 to RT3 may be configured not to be established by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus but to be established by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus. This avoids giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT1 to RT3 because they have won a big bonus or a regular bonus before the predetermined number of games is exhausted. Can do. Also, especially in RT2 and RT3, even if a stop operation is aimed at a bonus, replay is won with a very high probability, and control for aligning replay takes precedence over control for aligning bonus, It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the bonus is won. Also, since the bonus winning flag is carried over after the next game until winning, it is possible to win the winning bonus during that time, especially after RT2 and RT3 reach the predetermined number of games. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT2 and RT3.

  For example, when the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games played reaches a predetermined number after the re-game high probability state is started. Does not end the re-game high probability state, and when the special prize display result is derived or when the number of games digested without the special prize display result being derived reaches the prescribed game number You may comprise so that a game high probability state may be complete | finished.

  (15) The RT4 and RT5 replay winning probabilities in the above-described embodiment are the RTs that are likely to receive fewer medals, that is, the expected value of the number of medals acquired per game was used for setting the number of bets. It may be set so that RT becomes smaller than the number of medals. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted.

  In the case of such a configuration, when a bonus is won (further, a predetermined notification condition (a specific winning combination, a specific symbol combination derivation, etc.) may be satisfied) The type of small prize winning that has been determined to be permitted to be derived by means (a small part that can be awarded according to the operating procedure or a case where it is missed) or an operating procedure for generating the small prize winning Deciding whether or not to control to a procedure notification gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a state of performing a navigation effect, referred to as AT) for notifying (operation timing, operation order, etc.), and controlling to AT, an AT continuing game controlled by AT When the number is decided and it is decided to control to AT, it is configured to control to RT + AT until the number of AT continuing games is consumed or the bonus is won and RT is finished. Good. And during RT + AT, the expected value of the number of medals earned per game is made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets by winning the selected small role according to the navigation effect without missing it. The number of medals owned by the player may be increased. Further, when the player is further controlled by the AT during the RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the bonus may have been won, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, even if the bonus is not won, the player is given a sense of expectation because it is controlled to RT + AT when the predetermined notification condition described above is satisfied.

  (16) In the above embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting the number of bets and giving game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (17) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (18) In the embodiment described above, when a bonus that is not won simultaneously with Replay (2) and Replay (3) (Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus) is won, the replay winning probability is set to RT5 higher than RT1. The controlled example has been described. However, when a bonus that is not won at the same time as replay (2) and replay (3) (big bonus (1), regular bonus) is won, the replay winning probability is controlled to be the same as or lower than RT1, or the bonus The game state at the time of winning may be continuously controlled (that is, not controlled in another game state). This makes it difficult to predict whether or not a bonus has been won from the replay winning probability, and can add the fun of suddenly winning a bonus and improve the interest of the game.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which RT1 controlled after the bonus ends has a higher replay win probability than the initial gaming state controlled by digesting a predetermined game in RT1. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay winning probability between RT1 and the initial gaming state may be the same, and the number of determination values is set so that it is higher in the initial gaming state than in RT1. It may be. If the replay winning probability is set to be higher in the initial gaming state than in RT1, a player who has not obtained an advantageous gaming state over a long period of time can be more easily rescued. it can.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which RT1 is controlled after the bonus is ended has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game may be controlled to the initial gaming state after the bonus ends. That is, after the bonus is over, control is made to the initial gaming state, and when winning a replay (2) or replay (3), the corresponding RT2 or RT3 is controlled, and when the bonus is won, the corresponding RT4 or RT5 is controlled. You may comprise. Even in such a configuration, the same effect as that described in the above-described embodiment (that is, an effect obtained by replacing “RT1” with the “initial gaming state”) is obtained. In the slot machine configured as described above, the game is controlled in the initial game state from the end of the bonus until the replay (2) or replay (3) winning or bonus winning, so the game in which the initial game state occupies most of the game. It can be said that it corresponds to the normal gaming state.

  It should be noted that the gaming state controlled after the bonus ends may change depending on the type of bonus that has ended. For example, when the first bonus (for example, big bonus (1), regular bonus) of the bonuses ends, control is made to RT1, and the second bonus (for example, big bonus (2), big bonus (3)) ends. In such a case, the game may be controlled to the initial gaming state. Thereby, the gaming state that occupies most of the game until the next bonus is won can be changed according to the type of bonus that has been finished, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, replay (2) and replay (3) are taken as examples of specific winnings, and “melon-” corresponding to replay (2) is taken as an example of specific display results. "Grape-Grape" and "Cherry-Grape-Grape" corresponding to Replay (3). However, the specific winning is not limited to replays that are not missed, but may be other winning combinations, for example, specific winning combinations that are missed in accordance with the operation procedure. In this case, the specific display result may be a winning symbol combination that generates the specific winning combination, or a specific off-set combination that can be stopped only when the specific winning combination is missed. There may be. Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  (22) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c
RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (3)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other can be displayed in a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner. Is a slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Before the variable display device to display the results are derived, and pre-determining means for determining whether or not to permit the generation of a plurality of types of winning each including a special pay a particular winning,
Derivation operation detection means for detecting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation procedure detected by the derivation operation detection means;
When the special prize display result for generating the special prize is derived to the variable display device, it is determined that the occurrence of a prize accompanying the addition of the gaming value among the plurality of kinds of prizes is permitted in a normal gaming state. Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state determined at a higher rate than when
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, and the result of the special prize display is not derived to the variable display device, the determination is made that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed. Carry-over means to carry over after the game,
Specific gaming state control means capable of controlling to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state when it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the specific winning is permitted;
Production execution means for executing a predetermined production,
The pre-decision means accepts the occurrence of the special prize as a decision result that permits the occurrence of the special prize when the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the carry-over means. It is possible to determine simultaneous determination that is determined at the same time and non-simultaneous determination that is not determined at the same time as allowing the occurrence of the special prize,
The effect execution means executes the specific effect when it is determined that the specific winning is allowed regardless of the simultaneous determination or the non-simultaneous determination,
Further, the production execution means executes the specific production,
Executing a special prize-allowed effect for informing information capable of specifying that it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize when being determined at the same time;
When the non-simultaneous determination is performed, a specific gaming state control effect for informing information capable of specifying the control start to the specific gaming state is executed,
The derivation control means is configured to display the special prize display when the occurrence of the special prize is permitted and when the generation of a predetermined prize different from the special prize among the plurality of types of prizes is permitted. Perform control to give the variable display device priority to the winning display result that generates the predetermined winning than the result,
The effect execution means, after executing the special winning allowance effect, allows the occurrence of the predetermined winning that the winning display result is derived to the variable display device in preference to the special winning display result. A slot machine characterized in that, in a game that has not been decided, a special prize-producible effect is provided for notifying that the special prize display result is derived and the special prize can be generated. The variable display device is capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display regions that can be variably displayed by periodically moving the plurality of types of identification information,
In the slot machine, when the display result is derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, one game is completed, and the display result derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a display result of one game. Depending on the combination, winnings can be generated,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow generation of a plurality of types of winnings including the special winnings and general winnings other than the special winnings,
When the operation is detected by the derivation operation detection unit, the derivation control unit is configured to display from a display position positioned within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection unit. Perform control to derive any display position based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination to determine independently that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determination that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining that a second general winning different from the general winning is permitted, and simultaneously determining that the first general winning is permitted and the special winning is permitted are determined simultaneously. A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of the first general prize, permitting the occurrence of the second general prize, and allowing the occurrence of the special prize Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the third decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the third decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the fourth determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the fourth determination and the probability of the fourth determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Done
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection means, and the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection means A first display position at which identification information constituting a specific identification information combination in a first line among a plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display areas within a predetermined pull-in range stops and the plurality of lines Control is performed for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions where the identification information constituting the specific identification information combination is stopped on the second line. When both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection means Control is performed to derive the first display position, and the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection unit. Performing control to derive the second display position when only the second display position is located;
When the second condition in which the second determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection unit, and the variable display region corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection unit A control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within a predetermined pull-in range; Control is performed to derive the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the detection means. In the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detecting means, only the second display position is positioned among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range. And performing control to deriving the second display position when the slot machine according to claim 1. The variable display device is capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display regions that can be variably displayed by periodically moving the plurality of types of identification information,
In the slot machine, when the display result is derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, one game is completed, and the display result derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a display result of one game. Depending on the combination, winnings can be generated,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow generation of a plurality of types of winnings including the special winnings and general winnings other than the special winnings,
When the operation is detected by the derivation operation detection unit, the derivation control unit is configured to display from a display position positioned within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection unit. Perform control to derive any display position based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination to determine independently that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determination that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining that a second general winning different from the general winning is permitted, and simultaneously determining that the first general winning is permitted and the special winning is permitted are determined simultaneously. A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of the first general prize, permitting the occurrence of the second general prize, and allowing the occurrence of the special prize Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the fourth decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the third determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the third determination and the probability of the third determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Done
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection means, and the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection means A first display position at which identification information constituting a specific identification information combination in a first line among a plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display areas within a predetermined pull-in range stops and the plurality of lines Control is performed for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions where the identification information constituting the specific identification information combination is stopped on the second line. When both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection means Control is performed to derive the first display position, and the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detection unit. Performing control to derive the second display position when only the second display position is located;
When the second condition in which the second determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, an operation is detected by the derivation operation detection means, and the variable display area corresponding to the detected derivation operation detection means A control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within a predetermined pull-in range; Control is performed to derive the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display area corresponding to the detection means. In the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation detecting means, only the second display position is positioned among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range. And performing control to deriving the second display position when the slot machine according to claim 1.

Images